Home

ChromQuest 5.0 Chromatography Data System User Guide Version A

1. Begin Summary Summary Run End Summary Vial Summary QC Check Standard Unspiked Spiked Spike 1 of 2 C Spike 2 of 2 Duplicate Begin Calibration End Calibration r Run Type Parameters Report Templates Calibration Report crp External Standard Srp Cancel Help ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Creating QC Reports Printing Sequence Custom Reports To manually print a sequence custom report choose Reports gt Print gt Sequence Custom Report from the menu bar A list appears with the sequence reports for the current sequence listed For each sequence report the Report Type is listed along with the sequence rows included in the report and the report template used to produce the report To print a report select it and then click Print Figure 243 Print Sequence Reports window Print Sequence Reports xi Report Type Sequence Records Report Template li Sequence Summary 1 2 3 4 5 6 C ChromQuest Projects D efault T emplates Summary brp Note In order for sequence custom reports to appear in the Print Sequence Reports list you must have already processed a sequence in which sequence reports are designated Creating QC Reports A number of Quality Control reports can be generated automatically with ChromQuest These require specific information that is enter
2. 2008 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Surveyor is a registered trademark of Thermo Fisher Scientific in the United States and ChromQuest is a trademark of Thermo Fisher Scientific Microsoft Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other trademarks are the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific and its subsidiaries Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc provides this document to its customers with a product purchase to use in the product operation This document is copyright protected and any reproduction of the whole or any part of this document is strictly prohibited except with the written authorization of Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc The contents of this document are subject to change without notice All technical information in this document is for reference purposes only System configurations and specifications in this document supersede all previous information received by the purchaser Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc makes no representations that this document is complete accurate or error free and assumes no responsibility and will not be liable for any errors omissions damage or loss that might result from any use of this document even if the information in the document is followed properly This document is not part of any sales contract between Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc and a purchaser This document shall in no way govern or modify
3. Method Enter the name of the method to be used for data acquisition and processing Include the entire path name if the method is not in your default method directory You can select the method from a list of methods available on your disk by clicking the File button adjacent to the field Data path Enter a path name where the data acquired for this run will be stored Click the File button to select a path from a list of those on your disk ChromQuest User Guide 101 3 Method Development Single Run Acquisition 102 ChromQuest User Guide Data file Enter a file name to be used to save the data to a disk You can select a pre defined data file name such as sample ID by clicking the arrow It is not possible to use an existing file name unless the existing file is located in a directory whose path contains the term public For example if your data files are saved in a directory entitled C Public Data the ChromQuest files saved in this directory can be overwritten The software automatically appends a dat file extension You can change this if you wish Number of runs Enter the number of runs you wish to make The runs automatically proceed without review until completed incrementing each file name as designated If the sequence of single runs is cancelled and the user then repeats the single acquisition without changing any parameter the run number starts with the next number as if the sequenc
4. Define Groups Wenttete arousa SDD He EN OH lel IAGIUGE Tamed Feaks 3 Type a name to be used for the group in the Group Name box 4 Select Named Peaks for the Group Type Click OK to accept and exit the dialog box 5 Click the Peak Group Tables button from the toolbar Click the Groups tab to view the group table Figure 148 Peak Group Tables window Peak Group Tables Detector A e Name Group Type Group Def Ui a E The Group Type field should show Named Peaks Click the Group Def arrow to review the calibrated peaks selected for this group See Figure 149 for details on defining the named peaks for this group Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 161 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Figure 149 Peak Group Definition dialog box Peak Group Definition Ed Named Peaks Peaks in this Group 1 2 dichlorobenzene 1 3 dichlorobenzene 1 4 dichlorobenzene 2 chloroethylvinyl ether bromoform bromomethane carbon tetrachloride lt Remove Selection Add All gt gt lt lt Remove All OK Cancel Help 6 Review the list of peaks on the right If there is a peak that you do not want in the group select it and then click Remove Selection To add a peak to the group select it from the Named Peaks list and then click Add Selection You can quickly add or remove all of the peaks using the Add All or Remove All buttons When you a
5. 0 206981 0 206981 0 0061289 0 255611 0 255611 0 00774031 0 313444 0 313444 0 0104466 0 372136 0 372136 0 0148518 0 386275 0 386275 0 0220373 0 462859 0 462859 0 00218858 feu a So aa i So Seo a El So el 0 521291 Level 8 Replicate 2 0 521291 0 00682796 Internal Standard Curve Average RF 0 928568 IRF StDev 0 0820473 RF RSD 8 83589 Scaling None LSQ Weighting None Force Through Zero Off Replicate Mode wt Average Weight 100 Linear Fit ax b 148853 Goodness of fit r 2 0 994898 Cubic Fit ax 3 bx 2 cx d 8 d 0 0118366 Goodness of fit r 2 0 996075 Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Temporarily removing points from the calibration curve If you want to see the effect of removing one of the points from your calibration curve you can temporarily remove it from the calculation by clicking the point once with your mouse The point turns red which indicates it is not currently used for the calculation of the calibration curve The spreadsheet cells represented by the point also turn red To return the point to the calculation of the curve click the point again Points can also be disabled from the spreadsheet by clicking the cell in the spreadsheet and then pressing the DELETE key To restore the point press the DELETE key again Using the right mouse button Thermo Sci
6. 160 ChromQuest User Guide This technique assumes you have individually calibrated peaks in your chromatogram You define the groups by designating in the Group table the named peaks to be included in each group and giving each group a name Note In order to define a peak group graphically 1 make sure the current chromatogram is the chromatogram you wish to use 2 you have already created a calibrated peak table in your method and 3 you have analyzed the chromatogram 1 If you have not already done so open the data file containing the calibrated peaks you wish to include in your group Click the Analyze button to integrate the chromatogram and make sure the peaks are detected Define the peaks belonging to the group by graphically defining the group using a stored chromatogram To do this click the Define Group button on the toolbar or right click and choose Graphical Programming gt Define Group from the shortcut menu Click the mouse to the left of the first peak to be included in the group and then click the mouse again to the right of the last peak to be included in the group if they are contiguous peaks You can continue to add peaks to the group by clicking the mouse to define peak regions When you are done adding peaks to the group press the ESC key on your keyboard The following dialog box appears Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Figure 147 Define Groups dialog box
7. Grid Properties x Grid Size Margins Row count 5000 Left fo Top fs Column count f200 Right fico Batom fiso IV Autosize grid when generating reports r Page Order Default Cell Style Over then down Floating Wordwrap Normal C Down then over Overflow indicator Elipsis aa Cancel Help e Grid Size You can limit the size of the report spreadsheet to make it more manageable Row count To limit the number of rows in your report type a number here Column count Type the number of columns for your report Autosize grid when generating reports When this is selected the spreadsheet grid is automatically reduced to include only the number of rows and columns required for your report when printing If this is clear empty rows and columns are printed e Page Order Select the order for printing pages e Margins Enter the page margins in the fields indicated This establishes the margins used for printing the body of the advanced report Note that these margins are independent of the distance to frame setting in the header and footer 280 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Function Wizard Functions Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting e Default Cell Style Select the default setting for your cell style Any cell or range of cells can be changed from this independently Floating If this is s
8. MiData Mu j 9 28 38 H i Itical 001 i ighLimit Status Compound Unspiked Spiked Spike I Spike Low Limit i Cone Amount Cone i Recovery 30 000 0 034 33 133 In order for your sequence report to contain valid spike information when it is printed you must make sure your method and sequence are set up to create a sequence Spike report In the Peak table of the method entries are made for the Spike 1 Amount and Spike 2 Amount if two spiked samples are to be run the Low Spike Limit and the High Spike Limit The Low and High Spike limit values are entered as a percentage recovery used to determine whether the test passes or fails In the Sequence one sample must have an unspiked Run Type This is the sample that is not spiked This sample must be followed by the spiked sample This sample is identical to the unspiked sample except that it has been spiked with the standard components After the unspiked and spiked samples are analyzed a report is printed showing the calculated concentration of the compounds in the unspiked sample the amounts entered for the spiked amounts the calculated concentrations for the spiked samples and the percentages of the spiked amounts that are recovered The recovery percent value is compared to the Low and High Limit values and the status of the results Low High or OK is printed Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Creating QC Reports The followin
9. Number of levels to print before break E Cancel Help e Calibration data source Select where you want the data for the calibration table to come from Source Select the source of the calibration table from the Calibration Data Source Source drop down list Choose Peaks or Groups to select what calibration peak table to use Trace Select the specific data to be displayed Select a data channel for the trace and in the activated Peak list select a peak The calibration table for the selected peak is always displayed as shown in the following example Figure 222 Calibration data for the selected peak 252 ChromQuest User Guide Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Amount Ratio 0 05 0 1 0 15 Area Ratio 0 067069 2 0 116176 0 172302 RF 0 745498 0 860765 0 870566 Last Area Ratio 0 067069 2 0 116176 0 172302 Rep StDev 0 00148804 0 00332358 0 0019511 Rep RSD 2 21866 2 86082 1 13238 Rep 1 Area Ratio 0 066017 0 118526 0 170922 Rep 2 Area Ratio 0 0681214 0 113826 0 173681 Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Do not select Template unless you are creating or editing a calibration report template If you select Template calibration tables for all peaks in the calibration are automatically printed as defined in the crp template e View options View replicate RF Select the View Replicate RF check box if you want to display response factors for all replicates in the calib
10. This is the ID of the peak to be used as a reference peak for this component A reference peak is used to adjust the expected retention time of a calibrated component to compensate for changes in the chromatograph such as flow rate If more than one peak falls within the reference peak window the largest peak in the window is used as the reference peak Each peak can have its own reference peak An ideal reference peak is one that is always present in the sample and is well resolved from other peaks in the chromatogram Internal standards make excellent reference peaks Ifa named peak is assigned a reference peak then its expected retention time is calculated as follows Expected RT Actual Ref Peak RT Expected Ref Peak RT Peak RT ISTD ID ID of the peak to be used as internal standard for this component if you are using an internal standard method Note If you are doing an Internal Standard calibration you must enter an ISTD ID for each calibrated component If the peak is an internal standard enter its own ID in the ISTD ID column If you are doing External Standard calibration you should enter 0 in the ISTD ID column for all components You can designate more than one internal standard Units Enter the concentration units to be used in reporting results such as mg ml or vol RT Update Select how you want to update the expected retention times in your peak table The selection includes None after every analy
11. Update as part of a sequence acquisition sequence Note Concentration results for an unknown run cannot be calculated until you have a complete calibration curve saved in your method Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 121 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Creating Calibrations Graphically Before you can run a calibration standard the method must contain the names of all the peaks you want to quantitate their expected retention times for identification and the amounts you will be injecting in the standard samples These values are entered in a spreadsheet like table called a Peak table Define named peaks graphically 122 ChromQuest User Guide The most efficient and accurate way to enter this data into your method is to inject your first standard sample and save the data file on disk then use the stored chromatogram to graphically enter most of the data you need Note The following steps assume the acquisition sampling rate and integration portion of the method have been optimized for the samples to be acquired If you have already acquired a calibration standard and it is saved on your disk proceed to step 2 on page 123 To acquire the first standard sample 1 Choose Control gt Single Run from the main menu or click the Single Run button from the toolbar The Single Run Acquisition dialog box appears Figure 123 Single Run Acquisition dialog box Single Run Acquisition Ea Sample ID calib 1 O sn
12. Z Sj AKl aAa alma 298 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Preview Custom Report Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Whenever you use View gt Sequence Report to preview a custom report sequence or advanced report the report appears in a preview window where you can examine the report Figure 279 Preview custom report Sequence Summary Report window E Sequence Summary Report conc summary tpl Print Next Page Prey Page dee Zoom In mo Close The buttons at the top of the screen enable you to manipulate the view and print the report Channel A Data Ful Al nstrumert Last Method Retertion T RetertionT Retention T cA ChromQuest data muti CA ChromQvest data muti CA ChromQuest data mutti A ChromQuest data mutti A ChromQuest data muti A ChromQuest data muti Print Click this button to print the report You can choose which printer to send the report to Next Page Prev Page e hromQuest e VChromQuest e hromQuest e hromQuest e ChromQuest e WChromQuest 5 74 5 71 5 71 5 72 5 73 5 73 6 2 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 57 6 57 8 0 8 2 Retention Time 8 57 8 53 8 53 8 53 8 54 8 54 lolx Peak1 Area 63056 00 171813 0 299360 00 48256 00 779320 00 841161 00 These buttons let you navigate to the next or previous page in a multi page report Two Page This button lets you see two pages
13. e Calib Margin This selection creates an acceptance margin based on the percent difference between the peak area or height found during calibration and the current peak area or height in the method If the percent difference between these values exceeds this limit the peak is not used to update the calibration e Scale Use this parameter to apply a scaling factor to the calibration curve This factor is applied to the entered amounts prior to computing the calibration curve The purpose of using a scaling factor is to create a relationship between areas or heights and amounts that can be approximated by a polynomial fit A scaling factor can be applied to any fit type The available scaling operations are None 1 X 1 In X 1 In X sqrt X x2 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 131 3 Method Development Calibration Setup e Weighting Method Select a LSQ Weighting Method to be used for calculation of least squares regression fits either 1 Response 1 Response2 1 Amount 1 Amount2 or none Weighting gives increased importance to smaller concentrations and areas in the regression calculation It can be applied to linear quadratic and cubic fit types only e Level Type in the exact amount of each compound corrected for purity in your first calibration standard in the column labeled Level1 If you are doing a single level calibration you do not need to fill in any other Level columns If you are doing a multiple
14. e Select record ranges Select from the options next to the range desired Click Save to save the instrument activity log for the range selected in the file specified 98 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Instrument Activity Log Archive To archive the instrument activity log for an instrument choose File gt Instrument Activity Log gt Archive from the instrument window A dialog box appears where you can select the location for the archive file A default name is assigned with the logare extension Figure 105 Save As dialog box Save in gal ChromQuest Data Sequence Instrument 10001 C Template Instrument 10002 Tray Instrument 10028 Wich Methods Projects Request Filename 10 21 2001 8 38 39 PM_System 3 Cifline _10028logare Save as type Instrument Log Files bogarc Cancel Zi Instrument Activity Log Purge Thermo Scientific To purge the current instrument activity log choose File gt Instrument Activity Log gt Purge from the instrument window The following message appears Figure 106 Instrument Activity Log message window GC1 Ea All information in the instrument activity log will be deleted Would you like to archive this information No Cancel If you have set the enterprise options such that a purge is only allowed after archive you are presented with the Instrument Activity Archive dialog box if
15. groups and group calibration 145 insert new sequence 201 instrument activity log archive 99 export 98 printing 97 purge 99 instrument setup channel status 80 run time 81 sampling rate 80 trigger type 81 instrument window features 14 integration timed events adding and deleting 110 integration required integration events 107 L lock screen 16 manual integration fixes 111 mathematical operations 39 method custom reports 227 method development acquisition setup 78 calibration 111 save method as 100 method properties audit trail 86 description 84 options 85 method instrument setup 80 moving a trace 34 multi channel methods 171 multiplying traces 42 new search 10 new trace 20 normalizing traces 38 0 offline processing 173 open data files open with method 9 open with results 9 searching for data files 10 Thermo Scientific Index opening method and sequence files 10 P peak IDs renumbering 136 peak table calibrated peak parameters 128 peak table properties 134 preview custom report 299 print additional reports 268 print preview 266 printing custom reports 268 priority samples 217 process sequence 199 program architecture and data structure 4 project selecting new 13 public directories 11 Q QC reports 269 removing a trace 31 replicates and averaging calibrations 113 reprocessing 219 reprocessing sequences 191 response factor definition 86 retention time windo
16. or by clicking the Review Calibration button A window appears with the calibration information from your current method Figure 128 Review Calibration window GC1 Method LCV met Data Low Conc Volatiles 018 BAI Perec ANE les eee eles gt gt e Review Peak Calibration Detector 1 os a i L E e e E o E 0 745498 0 0670692 0 00148804 0 116176 0 860765 0 116176 0 00332358 0 172302 0 870566 0 172302 0 0019511 0 206981 0 966272 0 206981 0 0061289 0 255611 0 97805 0 255611 0 00774031 0 313444 0 957108 0 313444 0 0104466 0 372136 0 940516 0 372136 0 0148518 0 386275 1 03553 0 386275 0 0220373 0 462859 0 972219 0 462859 0 00218858 Ea eo el a a ae 0 959157 From Review Calibration you can 0 521291 0 00682796 Internal Standard Curve Average RF 0 928568 AF StDev 0 0820473 RF ASD 8 83589 Scaling None LSQ Weighting None Force Through Zero Off Replicate Mode Wt Average Weight 100 0 0148 Goodness of fit ne 2 0 994898 e Look at the calibration curve for each calibrated peak e Change and overlay calibration curve fit types Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 139 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 140 ChromQuest User Guide e Review the equations for curve fit types and examine th
17. 234 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Note The directory path shown for data files in reports is the originally specified directory path even if the data has been subsequently moved Figure 204 Method Custom Report window iix Times New Roman Wiz z B 7 u R 0 fo z eaea aa fe rere ere rf Bs Sr re Peres 04 01 2003 12 46 52 PM Method Custom Report MAIN ST PHARMACEUTICALS C ChromQuest Pr gj ects Default Data multi calibration level 1 dat Once a field is added to the custom report you can move it change the font and change the appearance The formatting remains constant however the field information changes as each report is printed to reflect the current information Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 235 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Adding a Chromatogram to the Report You can include as many chromatograms in your report as you wish Each chromatogram can appear in its own region or you can display multiple chromatograms pump profiles or graphs in the same region You can include chromatograms that have been saved on disk and you can include current data that changes as each run is acquired 1 Right click and choose Insert Graph from the shortcut menu Figure 205 Report Insert Graph options menu Insert Field gt Insert Graph Calibration Curve Insert Repot Data Graph Insert Object Update Fields E
18. Amount When all calibration standards have been run each calibrated component has its own calibration curve representing the response of that compound to the detector over the concentration range When an unknown sample is run each component concentration is determined from the calibration curve by finding the amount corresponding to the component area or height There are two general techniques for calibrating samples internal standard and external standard e Internal standards With the internal standard technique each sample both standards and unknowns is spiked with a known amount of a known compound When samples are subsequently run the areas are adjusted using the internal standard This technique is used to compensate for variations in sample work up and injection technique e External standards The external standard technique does not use a spiked standard component All unknown samples are compared to the standards without correction and therefore it is important that the injection size is accurate and reproducible Single Level and Multiple Level Calibrations ChromQuest User Guide A calibration curve can have as few as one level or can have multiple levels A single level calibration curve is created from running just one standard sample The calibration curve for each peak then becomes a line through the origin and a point representing the area amount relationship of the peak in the standard Running sever
19. Area ESS SASSA SSSA SS SSSSSSS Last Area 4 14 You can also add any of the three calibration report sections independently to your method custom report Note These sections are not available in sequence custom reports 248 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Adding a Calibration Curve to a Method Custom Report 1 Right click anywhere in the Method Custom Report window Choose Insert Graph gt Calibration Curve Figure 217 Method Custom Report Insert Graph options menu The following dialog box appears Figure 218 Calibration Curve Properties dialog box General page Calibration Curve Properties Peaks WW Peat o o ooo Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 249 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 250 2 In the Calibration Curve Properties dialog box make the appropriate selections e Calibration data source Select where you want the data for the calibration curve to come from Source Select the source of the calibration curve data from the Calibration Data Source Source list Select Peaks or Groups to select what calibration peak table to use Trace For the calibration curve trace select the specific data to be displayed When you select a data channel for the trace you must then select a Peak from the list This peak will always be displayed You should select Template only if you are
20. Detector A OF x al Event Start Time AH Manual Peak gt 3 051 3 743 2 v Calibration Setup Before you can get accurate amounts calculated from the areas of unknown peaks you must have a method that contains a calibration curve from which to calculate the answers This involves setting up your acquisition method to receive the areas from calibrated standard peaks then actually running the standards so that the standard areas are entered into your method Accurate results cannot be obtained until the method is completely calibrated In other words standards for each level of calibration must be run to complete the calibrated method Calibration Theory Thermo Scientific Calibration of chromatography instruments is usually necessary to obtain accurate results The purpose of calibrating an instrument is to verify the response of a detector to a given component The same detector may give different responses to equal amounts of different components under identical chromatographic conditions Another reason for calibration involves the linearity of the detector The rate of detector response to many compounds decreases with increasing component concentration therefore requiring calibration of the detector at varying concentration levels of the same component a multi level calibration ChromOQuest User Guide 111 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 112 Figure 116 Multi level calibration curve 0 10 20 30 40 50
21. Level A calibration level corresponds to a point or points if replicates are used on the calibration curve and represents the relationship of peak areas to a calibrated amount The number of calibration levels might be different for each component ChromQuest software can handle an unlimited number of concentration levels per component For each level the following fields are displayed Amount Amount Ratio This is the component Amount external standard or Amount Ratio internal standard represented by this level Area or Height Area Ratio Height Ratio This is the peak area or height if external standard or Area Ratio or Height Ratio for internal standard for the designated level RF This is the response factor for the peak at the designated level Last Area ratio Height ratio If no replicate injections are made this is the last area or height or area ratio height ratio for the peak at the designated level If replicate injections have been made this is the old average of the replicates which is used for weighting purposes Residual A residual is the difference between the user entered concentration and the concentration read back from the computed calibration curve Rep StDev This is the standard deviation for the replicates Rep RSD This is the percent relative standard deviation for the replicates Rep 1 x Area ratio height ratio Thermo Scientific 3 M
22. Method nterprise Projects D efault Methods amino_2 met Gab Cancel Data path D enterprise Projects D efault Data i gt Help Data file Ca 001 dat T Print method report Amount values Sample amount 1 Internal standard amount 1 Multiplication factor 1 alibration level 1 gt Gear allicalibration J Gea replicates P Gleer calibration for Esel M Average replicates J Pant calibration report Description Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Fill in the information that follows At this point leave the Amount Values as their default values Run information Sample ID Enter a Sample ID for the run The ID can contain both text and numbers It is saved with the data file Method Enter the name of the method to be used for data acquisition and processing Include the entire path name if the method is not in your default method directory You can select the method from a list of methods available on your disk by clicking the File Folder button adjacent to the field Data path Enter a path location where the data file will be stored If you wish you can select a path by clicking the File button Data file Enter a file name to be used to save the data to a disk It is not possible to over write an existing data file To use an existing data file name you should use the Windows utilities to rename the
23. Overview of Sequence Operations o u tece dtl nneur rere 180 Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard oo acca einen eda wes 180 Sequence Wizard Method siecnt ecb thoi LEN Re ees 181 Sequence Wizard Unknowns 2ackepiddpxaas a Roe cw dena iene 183 Sequence Wizard Autosampler so cosa esther dearer ununure 185 Sequence Wizard Calibration inn eee tees ws ee a a 186 Sequence Wizard Reports n daci ne aan akc een ear re ee 188 Creating a Reprocessing Sequence n eee ees 191 Sequence Wizard Select Files 0s ssa vse hat aca i sca w Sala 192 Sequence Wizard Open data files s cicacc yee a ee es Ps a 193 Sequence Spreadsheet Basics prs ad aca peded ae heh epia Cue eR we Gu 194 The Sequence Spreadsheet Mu uCorcicins Mae ecole neat eree 202 Setting the Sequence Properties ate cyawenat oor de wine eae 209 Enabling the Sequence Audit Vail Giindeaeiie eon tek tee 211 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide v Contents Acquisition Using a Sequence 6 cece eens 212 Schedule R n tsss aged a a eea aa a E a 214 R n Quetiess ien osie sete vin EEE Beane E E ERE EOE G 215 Bracketed Calibrations n e to 8 area dae AIS Ree aa PI 217 Sequence Reprocessing spia nispi ec E EE ETS ERA 219 Sequence Summary Reports 6 cee eens 220 Create a Sequence Summary Report Template 0004 222 Designating Sequence Summary Runs 0 00 222 Turning on Sequence Summary Rep
24. Print All Print Selection nabled Yes Type Width bn Weight changed from 0 to bn Flag changed from Repla Calibration Flag changed from Repla Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Calibration Flag changed from Repla Expected Retention Time changed fr Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Calibration Flag changed from Repla S n Weight changed from 0 to Reason Width c Avetrag Averag Averag Averag Avetag Averag Averag Avetag Averag Select this option to view full information on the selected activity Print All Select this option to print all of the audit trail entries Print Selection Select this to print only the highlighted entry ChromQuest User Guide 93 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method View the Data File Audit Trail To view the audit trail for the current data file choose File gt Data gt Audit Trail and a listing of data audit trail events appears These events include the following e the name of the logged user e the time the activity was logged e the change or activity for the data file along with the method used to analyze the data MIF table changes and changes to the data file description e the reasons if any for the change or activity Figure 98 Data Audit Trail window C Data Audit Trail System System System System 12 9 97 12 12 18 12 9 97 12 1205 12 9 97 12 11 51 12
25. These buttons include bold italic underline strike through color left justify center right justify add buttons borders shading view header footer and zoom When clicked the formatting represented by these buttons is applied to any text or item currently selected Once you click a formatting button the formatting remains in effect for new text until you click the button again e Right mouse click access to menus for inserting chromatograms report objects and chromatography and method information e Items inserted into the report must first be activated by clicking on them in order to edit or move them e Report tables can be removed quickly with a right mouse click inside the table and then selecting Delete Table Your custom report can be generated by creating a totally new report or by modifying an existing report You can open an existing report template by choosing File gt Report Template gt Open or clicking the Open button in the toolbar followed by Open Report Template When you select a report template from the disk it overwrites your existing custom report General Text Information Enter general text information on your report by simply typing it on the page Use the formatting buttons on the ribbon to customize fonts and the appearance of the text Figure 200 Method Custom Report window 10x Copperplate Gothic Light 2E E a U ase B 8 222 58 ail 100 Z Method Custom Report MAIN
26. You can change the appearance of any trace without adding a new trace Right click the chromatogram window and choose Appearance When you select this option you see an identical dialog box to that shown for the Appearance page Figure 21 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 25 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Sub items available on the Appearance page are as follows Item Sub Item Description Graph Background Select the color of the graph background Default is black Graph Title Select a color and font for the Title of the graph There must be a Graph Title defined in the Axis Setup tab in order for it to appear in the window Graph Left Y Axis Select a color for the left Y Axis of the graph Graph Left Y Axis Major Ticks Select a color for display of major unit marks on the Left Y Axis Graph Left Y Axis Minor Ticks Select a color for display of minor unit marks on the Left Y Axis Graph Left Y Axis On Off Turns On or Off the Left Y Axis Graph Right Y Axis Select a color for display of a right Y Axis Graph Right Y Axis Major Ticks Select a color for display of right Y Axis major ticks Graph Right Y Axis Minor Ticks Select a color for display of right Y Axis minor ticks Graph Right Y Axis On Off Turns On or Off the right Y Axis Graph X Axis Select a color for the X Axis display Graph X Axis Major Ticks Select a color for display of major uni
27. You can use the Text Box function to move a chromatogram or other graph to a position next to a report table To do this create a text box Then click inside the text box and insert a graph Once the graph is inserted in the text box you can use the drag and drop feature of the text box to move the chromatogram or graph to a position adjacent to a report table on your custom report Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports e Undo Insert Delete Once you have inserted an item onto your report field report graph and so on you can Undo the action by pressing CTRL Z on your keyboard Headers and Footers If you want to enter information that will appear on every page of your report click the View Header Footer button or right click the report area and then choose Header Footer from the shortcut menu You can then view and edit the header and footer area of your report To edit the header or footer click the displayed header or footer area and enter the information you want to include Note that this area can contain free text as well as chromatography fields and objects It cannot include report tables or drawing objects When you have finished formatting the header footer or both you can turn off the display of the header and footer by again clicking the View Header Footer toolbar button or right click and choose Header Footer Note the check mark next to Header Footer is turned off Cut Copy and Paste
28. __ Channel A Multi Calibration Level 3 Minutes Note The vertical line cursor moves with your mouse The retention time where the cursor is located is shown at the top of the chromatogram window 3 Add an annotation for Area to the chromatogram a Right click the trace to open a shortcut menu b Choose Annotations The Trace Annotations Properties dialog box appears Figure 76 Trace Annotation Properties dialog box Annotation tab Trace Annotation Properties 1 Current Data Channel A a Pk Area Percent Height Height Percent ESTD concentration ISTD concentration NORM concentration al aticlth M RT Window M Show undetected named peaks Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 73 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files 74 E ChromQuest User Guide In the Available Annotations list double click the Area annotation d Click OK The trace is now annotated with peak areas Figure 77 Chromatogram E Channel A Time 9 97991 Minutes Amplitude 0 272 mAU __ Channel A Multi Calibration Level 3 40 Area 20 Q T 0 EASE 0 1 2 3 Minutes 4 Add the Valley to Valley timed event to integrate the cluster of 4 large peaks with valley to valley baselines Click the Valley button in the Integration toolbar b Follow the instructions in the status bar at the bottom of the Instrument window These instructions
29. calibration set is defined as one or more calibration runs that occur in a sequence Thermo Scientific Run Sequence Insert New Sequence 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics e Printing Print method reports Select this option if you want the custom report defined in the method to be printed for each run of the sequence Print sequence reports Select this option if you want sequence reports to be printed Note If you are currently reprocessing a sequence you must have the Results review pause after each run option selected in order to submit an additional sequence to the queue If you are reprocessing a sequence without this option selected you must stop the sequence select the Results review pause after each run option and then start it again At this point you can submit one or more sequences to the queue Use this command to run a sequence It is the same as choosing Control gt Sequence Run Use this command to create sequence rows and insert them into your spreadsheet This command calls the Sequence Wizard which takes you through the process of defining the new sequence to insert Once you have completed all the Sequence Wizard pages the newly defined sequence rows are inserted into your current sequence spreadsheet Resizing Sequence Spreadsheet Columns Thermo Scientific You can make the Sequence spreadsheet columns wider by graphically dragging the edge To do this move the cur
30. e Calib Flag Select Replace WtAverage to run a standard to determine how the calibration areas heights for each group will be affected they are either replaced or averaged with the current replicate areas in the calibration method If Calib Weight is set to a value other than 100 a weighted average of the areas heights is calculated For details on calibration averaging see Replicates and Averaging Calibrations on page 113 ChromOQuest User Guide 153 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Each time a calibration average is performed the value is saved in the method as Last Area which is subsequently used to calculate weighted averages e Calib Weight You can designate a weight for the average of the replicates The weighting factor is applied to replicate injections as shown in the following example Current run value area height 101 Replicate 1 104 Replicate 2 100 Replicate 3 102 Current Last Area Value 102 Using a weighting factor of 60 the new method average is 104 100 102 3 6 101 4 101 6 Note For Internal Standard calibrations each Replicate represents a ratio of the component area height to internal standard area height Calib Margin This selection creates an acceptance margin based on the percent difference between the group area or height found during calibration and the current group area or height in the method If the percent difference between the
31. e Y min If you have selected a User Defined scale enter a minimum value for the Y axis e Y max If you have selected a User Defined scale enter a maximum value for the Y axis e Units Select the units for display e X offset Enter a value in units for offset of the X axis e Y offset Enter a value in units for offset of the Y axis e Y scale If desired enter a multiplier that will apply to the entire trace here Note You can set the X axis range by right clicking and choosing Axis Setup from the shortcut menu e Annotations Click this button to display the trace annotations dialog e Hide Details Click this button to hide the current trace details and display only the spreadsheet e Reset Scaling Click this button to reset the scaling values to their original values If you have multiple traces in your chromatogram window and you want to remove one or more of them from the chromatogram window right click the window and select Properties from the shortcut menu A spreadsheet appears where the currently displayed traces are listed To completely remove a trace from the chromatogram window select the row by clicking the row number and then press the DELETE key or choose Edit gt Delete To temporarily remove the trace from the window clear the check box in the Show column Click OK to return to the chromatogram window ChromOQuest User Guide 31 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 32 Se
32. muti calibration level 6 dat Files of type Chrom Files dat cdf asc b are pts Find files that match these criteria Sample ID gt Created any time 7 Find Now Analyst gt Modified ary time New Search Options Method Original Acquisition 7 Open with Pretreatment Results MostRecent z EER 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Cancel ih Help e Open Data File Options Search results 4 Use the Options area to save time by loading additional information at the time the data file is opened Method If you select Current the current method does not change when you open the data file When you select one of the other Method options the new method is loaded at the time the data file is opened From Results loads the method used to create the most recent results in the data file Original Acquisition loads the method used for the original acquisition of the data file This method replaces your current active method Results When one of the Results options is selected the data file is opened along with the selected results When a data file is opened with results the integration and baselines that generated those results are displayed automatically when the chromatogram is drawn on the screen If you select Previous Last Results the data file is opened with the results from the last time the chrom
33. stacking traces 35 stretching 37 subtracting traces 42 summary reports designating summary runs 222 export summary 221 templates 222 turning on sequence summary reports 223 T Table Wizard parameters 291 run direction 293 304 ChromQuest User Guide run parameters 293 statistics 294 table type 290 types 292 templates 226 time and amplitude 18 tooltips 16 trace properties annotation 23 appearance 24 deleting a trace 31 trace setup 29 trigger 81 tutorial acquisition setup 49 creating a sequence table 59 creating a single level calibration 55 exploring a peak table 69 reviewing multi level calibration curves 67 running a preliminary sample 52 running a sequence file 66 steps for using ChromQuest 4 1 47 using integration timed events 72 U uncalibrated range 148 unzoom 18 user programs 169 utilities 43 V view run queue 215 viewing a sequence report 261 viewing tiled or overlay data 18 X X axis get limits 28 32 setting limits 32 user defined 28 Z zooming 18 Thermo Scientific
34. you have selected a numeric field such as level or repetitions the selected item is automatically filled down the spreadsheet from where it is highlighted If you select a row a File name or a Sample ID the following dialog box appears where you can designate a name and indicate whether you want to increment its associated numbering Figure 179 Fill Down dialog box Fill Down x cenen Semple 10 Sample ll esey Data file Ca 001 amino_2 met Rep1 dat gt Cancel Help Increment For Sample ID and Data File fields you can opt to automatically increment the number or change the name by selecting the Increment check box You can select parameters for the increment in a manner similar to that used in the Sequence Wizard by clicking the blue arrow button and selecting from the list Be sure to include the correct number of placeholders For example if you start at number lt 10 gt but the number of files is between 100 and 1000 you should enter lt 010 gt Click OK to fill the information down the spreadsheet ChromQuest User Guide 197 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics Sequence Spreadsheet Properties 198 ChromQuest User Guide displayed in the spreadsheet Columns Run Status Run Type Level Cone Override Custom Parameters Reps Sample ID Method Filename Sample Amt ISTD Amt Multiplier 1 Multiplier 2 Multiplier 3 Dilutor 1 Dilu
35. 2 sequence acquisition where you acquire data automatically for a series of runs using a pre programmed sequence that defines the number of injections methods file names and calibration 44 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Stop Run When you want to stop data acquisition during a run click the STOP button that appears on the toolbar when the run is in progress or choose Control gt Stop Run A dialog box appears that presents options for how you want to stop the run Figure 47 Stop Run dialog box 3 Stop current run and sequence run Stop all run queue items you submitted Stop all run queue items x ees e e Stop current run only Select this to end the run currently in progress If the run is a part of a currently queued sequence the sequence continues with the next run e Stop current run and sequence run This selection stops the run currently in progress and terminates the sequence it is a part of Other queued items will proceed e Stop all run queue items you submitted This selection stops the run currently in progress and terminates all the items in the queue that were submitted by you Queue items submitted by other users are unaffected e Stop all run queue items This selection stops the run currently in progress and terminates all items in the run queue Note 1 When a run is stopped the data up to that
36. 63056 00 52508 00 4732 00 79411 00 muti calibration level 2 dat PNASTOS 17181300 141753 00 134637 00 214266 00 muti calibration level 3 dat PNASTDS 299360 00 249693 00 239475 00 376822 00 muti calibration level 4 dat PNASTDS 462656 00 3456400 375582 0 583249 00 63056 00 52508 00 474832 0 79411 00 462356 00 3456400 375582 0 583249 00 24022125 209629 50 19931 30 313437 00 149927 69 127573 74 12247 00 198028 74 59 76 60 86 6142 5 99 Note In order to display a Sequence Summary report you had to define a sequence summary advanced report template and set the Run Type to include Summary in the Sequence Table for the sequence runs to be included in the report Designate the correct sequence summary template file to be used for generating the report While in the Summary Report viewing window use buttons at the top of the window to print the report display additional pages zoom or close the report view 262 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports Automatically Printing Sequence Reports In order for sequence reports to be printed automatically during the running or reprocessing of a sequence you must specifically request that the reports be printed Select the Print Sequence Reports check box at the start of a sequence acquisition or processing Figure 236 Process Sequence dialog box x Sequence information P Sequence name st Projects Default Sequences multilevel calibration 2 seq a anc
37. 649 13135 42 Totals 1824161 100 000 1509 876 100 000 Group 1 110 0 445 1391 876 92 185 5 83 Totals 110 0 445 1391 876 92 185 Example 4 In this example the concentration of Peak 2 is calculated and reported using its own response factor Its area is NOT used in the calculation of the group response factor Include named peaks option is cleared The concentrations of unnamed peaks in the group range are not calculated and reported individually The group concentration is calculated using the total area of all defined group peaks and the group response factor The total group concentration is included in the individual Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 159 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration peak report Because the group total is included as a separate line in the peak table the Area and Norm concentrations do not add up to 100 Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks option is cleared Figure 146 Run report for example 4 Name Retention Area AreaPercent ESTD Cone NORM Conc Response Time Factor Peakl 5 719 462656 25 363 40 000 2 649 10405 54 Peak 2 Groupl 6 558 394564 21 630 3 000 0 530 38653 03 Group 1 6 932 1750 0 096 0 000 0 000 5 83 Group 1 7 435 6360 0 349 0 000 0 000 5 83 Peak3 8 264 375582 20 589 30 000 1937 10020 50 Peak4 8530 583249 31 974 40 000 2 649 13135 42 Group 1 8110 0 445 1391 876 92 185 5 83 Totals 1332271 100 445 1509 876 100 000 Calibrated Peak Grouping Named Peaks
38. 7 15 18 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire Print All urveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 09 23PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire lt Print Selection urveyor System xl 101 001 8 21 18 PM Sequence Acouire and AER Run 51 9 I Surveyor Systema Note Over time the instrument activity log file might become large so periodically you should archive the file to a floppy or another location and then purge it Instrument Activity Log Manual Entry You can enter or type a manual entry in the instrument activity log by choosing File gt Instrument Activity Log gt Manual Entry Figure 103 Instrument Activity dialog box Instrument Activity x User ML Cardosa Source USER ENTRY Activity Cancel lt Help Changed septum Type in the information you wish to enter in the instrument activity log and then click OK Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 97 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Instrument Activity Log Export You can export the instrument activity log to a file by choosing File gt Instrument Activity Log gt Export The following dialog box appears Figure 104 Instrument Activity Export dialog box Instrument Activity Export am a alert Text Tab delimited txt v 06 09 2000 v 06 19 2000 v e File name Type the name to be used to store the instrument activity export file e Save as type Select the type of file you wish to save from the list
39. Annotation Thermo Scientific Click Annotation in the Data Graph Properties Trace Setup box Or right click the chromatogram window and select Annotation from the shortcut menu see Figure 20 The Trace Annotation Properties dialog box opens where you can designate how you want the trace you are adding to be annotated Figure 20 Trace Annotation Properties dialog box Trace Annotation Properties xj Annotation Trace 1 Current Data Channel A Peaks Bi Available Annotations Show the following annotations Pk Name Retention Time Area Percent gt Height Height Percent ESTD concentration ISTD concentration stot concentration Deane Bb M RT Window O M Show undetected named peaks gt I Cancel Apply Apply To All Help Select the trace from the Trace list and select what features you wish to annotate For the selected trace click an Available Annotation When the annotation is highlighted you can add it to the annotations to be shown by either clicking the Green arrow button or double clicking your selection For certain annotations you can also designate the number of places to be displayed to the right of the decimal point Type this value in the Decimals box for the highlighted item Select the check boxes to display the Baseline USP Width Retention Time Windows or Group Ranges on the trace With the SEC option installed yo
40. Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure e Reason The reason for the change if changes were logged To view the details of a given entry right click the entry and choose Show Detail from the shortcut menu Figure 5 Method Audit Trail window Show Detail menu E Method Audit Trail OF x E Width c bn Weight changed from Oto Averag bn Flag changed from Repla Averag Show Detail TE ype Width i System 4 Named Print All System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Print Selection System 4 3 97 10 17 264M Named ze aeran Weight changed from Oto Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M NamedPeaks P Calibration Flag changed from Repla verag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM NamedPeaks P Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M Named Peaks P Calibration Flag changed from Repla Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M Named Peaks P Expected Retention Time changed fr Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M Named Peaks P Calibration Weight changed from Oto Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M NamedPeaks P Calibration Flag changed from Repla Averag Details of the highlighted entry appear Opening Data Files ChromQuest User Guide When you open a file using ChromQuest you are presented with a dialog box Use it to open the file specify parameters for searching as well as preview file contents From the Ma
41. Calibration dialog box Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Figure 127 Analysis Single Level Calibration dialog box Analysis Single Level Calibration xj m Analysis information N Calibrate O E oe ee seca Calibration level 1 a Method Cancel Data path _I Surveyor System3 1111 Data 4312 67 8 T Clear all calibration Help I Clear calibration for level Data file cals S_Needle_Flush_Wash_Temp_Throw_431 J Print calibration report J Print method report Benien we B e m Amount values J Average replicates Sample amount ee Internal standard amount Multiplication factors Fg a fo Dilution factors ez fo il This dialog box appears similar to the Single Run dialog box used to acquire a single data acquisition sample However choosing Analysis gt Single Level Calibration does not initiate data acquisition It updates the method specified using areas from the specified stored data file e Analysis information Sample ID The sample ID for the data file selected is displayed here Method Enter the name of the method to be calibrated Include the entire path name if the method is not in your default method directory You can select the method from a list of methods available on your disk by clicking the File button adjacent to the field Data path Enter the path name where the data file is located You can select the path name from
42. Calibration dialog box appears The Sample ID for the data file appears in the Sample ID box the data path for the data file appears in the Data Path box and the name of the data file appears in the Data File list Figure 60 Analysis Single Level Calibration dialog box Analysis Single Level Calibration E xi m Analysis information M Calibrate Sammeln resoot Calibration level 1 Method CAChromQuest Projects Default Methods Test _ 5 Cae Data path C ChromQuest Projects Default Data IV Clear all calibration Help J Clear calibration for level Data file T t001 dat gt A S as es 7 J Print calibration report J Print method report T Clear replicates LALA m Amount values I Average replicates Sample amount P Internal standard amount Poo Multiplication factors I il a Dilution factors od fo fod 3 In the Method box browse to your method Test met 4 Leave the Amount Values set to 1 For details on how these values are used see Chapter 3 Method Development 5 Select the Calibrate check box 6 Type 1 in the Calibration Level box 7 Select the Clear All Calibration check box Selecting the Clear All Calibration check box allows the absorbance values to be cleared from the calibration table as the calibration standard is analyzed 8 Click Start When the analysis is complete the chromatogram is integrated and the areas for the named peaks are entered into the Rev
43. ChromQuest you can define as many groups as you want Peaks in a group do not have to be contiguous peaks in the chromatogram Groups can be defined in one of three ways e Uncalibrated Range In this type of grouping you define a time range A manual response factor is applied to determine the concentration of uncalibrated peaks eluting within that time range e Calibrated Range Group Calibration Using this technique you calibrate peaks together as a group creating a common response factor for the group Peaks in the Calibrated Range can be reported as a single peak using the common response factor for the group as a basis for calculation of concentration You can also choose to include named peaks in a calibrated range group ChromOQuest User Guide 145 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Defining a Group 146 ChromQuest User Guide e Designate Named Peaks to be included in a group Calibrated Peak Grouping Using this technique a group report gives the concentration summation of all calibrated peaks designated as belonging to that group All peaks in the group can also be reported individually because they also appear in the peak table Defining a group is similar to defining calibrated peaks The group is defined manually by typing information into the Groups table or it is defined graphically using an integrated chromatogram To define a group graphically click the Define Group button or right click and
44. Copy Paste Insert Paste amino_2 met 01 amino_2 me Insert Line amino_2 met 1 amino_2 me sla Clear Clear All amino_2 metO2amino_2 me amino_2 metO03amino_2 me Select All amino_2 met D3amino_2 me amino_2 metD4amino_2 me Open Method anre Zeller me Open Data amino_2 metD4amino_2 me Pae Ema Danne ne Process Sequence Run Sequence Insert New Sequence Set Run Types amino_2 met05amino_2 me amino_2 metO05amino_2 me seme ine amino_2 metO6amino_2 me Properties amino_2 metO5amino_2 me To select a field click that field to highlight it To select a row click the Run to highlight the entire row To select the entire spreadsheet right click and choose Select All ojwjwjn nj lojojolojolojojojwjwinjn Certain spreadsheet fields have choices available for you to select Fields with available selections display a combo box button when the field or row is selected Click the button to display the available choices Note Once you have cleared or deleted a row from your spreadsheet the blank row remains in the spreadsheet until you close the sequence spreadsheet and re open it or press the F5 key e Cut This command cuts the current selection and places it on the clipboard You can subsequently paste the information to another application using the paste co
45. Data Group Range Select a color line type and line weight for the group range Axis Setup Thermo Scientific bar Select a color font type and font style to display the group range Use the Axis Setup page to configure the appearance of the axis on your chromatogram These settings apply to active traces To access this page right click the axis of the chromatogram and choose Axis Setup from the shortcut menu Figure 23 Axis Properties dialog box Axis Setup page Axis Properties xi Axis Setup Graph title x Axis x Autoscale Use this range Min J0 Max 40 Minutes Get Current Axis Limits Margins Top fi 0 Bottom fi 0 re Orientation m General Options M Show legend M Include sample ID in legend TA Ghan arid IT Include data file name in lege E pa v Portrait Landscape Cancel Apply Help e Graph title Enter a title for the graph if desired This title appears at the top of the graph ChromQuest User Guide 27 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure e Axis From this list select the axis of interest Left Y Axis Right Y Axis or X Axis Then for your selection you can choose the limits for the axis For Y Axis selections you can choose Use limits of trace to get the limits from one of the traces in the window or you can select the Manually set trace s limits to and set the Y Axis limits to y
46. Default Sequences T Cancel m Run range Al H Selection C Range m Mode Tower N7A 7 Processing mode Normal bai Bracketing None haf TT Review G Results review pause efter each run Calibration review pause etter each calibration set Printing J Print method reports P Print sequence reports Click the File Open button next to the Sequence Name box Then select the sequence that you created as you performed this Tutorial If you have a printer connected to your instrument select the Print Sequence Reports check box Leave the other settings in the dialog box at their defaults If you have not already done so prepare your autosampler to inject your standard sample followed by 3 unknown samples Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files 7 Click Start When the sequence is completed you have acquired data files for one standard and three unknown runs In addition you have generated a sequence summary report for the sequence Figure 69 Sequence summary report ChromQuest Sequence Summary Report Sequence name Test seq Analyst B A Cook Channel A Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak 3 Peak 4 Data Filename ESTD ESTD ESTD ESTD Cal_Test001 dat 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 Test002 dat 20 23 20 06 18 36 Test003 dat 0 26 12 Test004 dat 39 62 39 61 34 45 Min 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 Max 39 62 39 61 34 45 39 42 Mea
47. Divide Moving a Trace You can grab a trace and move it with your mouse right click and choose Operations gt Move Trace When you select this command and move your cursor over a trace the cursor will change to a move icon When this occurs you can grab the trace by clicking and dragging the chromatogram to a new location When you release the mouse button the chromatogram is placed where your cursor was located when you released the button Move Trace appears at the upper right corner of the window You can continue to move traces When finished right click and choose Operations gt Move Trace again to turn off the move trace operation 34 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Stacking Traces Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure You can quickly change the X axis and Y Axis offset for a trace Right click and choose Operations gt Stack Traces A dialog box appears where you can enter a new X axis and Y axis offset which is applied to additional traces displayed in the chromatogram window Figure 30 Stack Traces dialog box Stack Traces x Offsets x p Enter a value for X offset and Y offset for the additional traces and then click OK The chromatograms are redrawn using the offsets you entered Figure 31 Chromatograms before stacking E Channel A Ioj x Time 6 88111 Minutes Amplitude 0 000135 0 10 z ro F Tan fhannel A4 _ _
48. Figure 197 Summary Run Types dialog box Sample Run Type s xi Clear All Calibration pj Run Type Parameters Clear Calibration at Level Average Replicates Clear Replicates Begin Loop End Loop Shutdown Print Additional Reports Report Template Begin System Suitability D enterprise Projects Default Templates Summar Bl System Suitability Standard End System Suitability Begin Summary Summary Run End Summary QC Check Standard Unspiked Spiked Spike 1 of 2 Spike 2 of 2 Duplicate Begin Calibration End Calibration Cancel Help Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Summary Reports If you want a run to be included in the summary report select the Summary Run check box If the run is the first run to be summarized select the Begin Summary check box When this box is selected you must designate the name of the summary report template If the run is the last run to be summarized select the End Summary check box The Begin Summary and End Summary types allow you to generate more than one summary report within your sequence Turning on Sequence Summary Reports Once you have completed the Sequence Summary dialog box to set up the parameters to include in the sequence summary report turn on the sequence summary report printing by selecting the Print Sequence
49. Groupl 6553 394564 21 630 3 000 1 162 38653 03 Group 1 6 932 1750 0 096 0 000 0 000 705 93 Group 1 7 435 6360 0 349 0 000 0 000 705 93 Peak3 264 375582 20 589 30 000 4353 10020 50 Peak4 8 530 533249 31 974 40 000 5 810 13135 42 Group 1 402674 22 074 570 414 82 859 705 93 pe Jms moal osema sooo 2226835 122 074 633 414 100 000 Example 3 In this example the concentration of Peak 2 is calculated and reported using its own response factor Its area is NOT used in the calculation of the group response factor Include named peaks option is cleared The concentrations of unnamed peaks in the group range are calculated using the group response factor The group concentration is calculated by summing the concentrations of the peaks defined for the group The total group is not included in the individual peak report but is listed separately in the group report section Because the group total is not included as a separate line in the peak table the Area and Norm concentrations add up to 100 Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks option is selected Figure 145 Run report for example 3 Name Retention Area AreaPercent ESTD Cone NORM Conc Response Time Factor Peakl 5719 462656 25 363 40 000 2 649 10405 54 Peak 2 Groupl 6558 394564 21 630 8 000 0 530 38653 03 Group 1 6 932 1750 0 096 300 343 19 892 583 Group 1 7 435 6360 0 349 1091 533 72 293 5 83 Peak3 8 264 375582 20 589 30 000 1987 10020 50 Peak4 530 583249 31 974 40 000 2
50. Guide The following example demonstrates how bracketing works Figure 192 Sequence Bracket window E Sequence Bracket seq OF x ibrati E 1 Bracket01 test met Brackett E Calibration 2 BracketO2 test met Bracket0 Unknown 0 Bracket03 test met Bracket0 Unknown 0 Bracket04 test met Bracket0 Calibration 1 Bracket05 test met Bracket0 Calibration 2 BracketO6 test met Bracket0 Unknown 0 BracketO test met Bracket0 Using the above sequence as an example using the Standard method of bracketing unknown samples numbers 3 and 4 are calculated using response factors generated after calibration runs 1 2 5 and 6 are completed Unknown sample runs 7 and 8 are calculated using response factors generated after running calibration sample runs 5 6 9 and 10 For the same example using the Sequence method of bracketing all unknown samples are calculated using response factors generated after all calibration standards are completed 1 2 5 6 9 and 10 Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Reprocessing Sequence Reprocessing In addition to using sequences for data acquisition you can use a sequence to reprocess previously acquired data A sequence can be used to calibrate multi level calibrations using stored data files It can also be used to generate reports post run To use a sequence to reprocess a run right click the sequence spreadsheet and choose Process or select the Sequence gt Process command F
51. Hhannel A Channel A PHA STDS HA STDS 1 RHA STDS Figure 32 Chromatograms after stacking E Channel A Jof x arid Channel A PHA STDS1 ChromQuest User Guide 35 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure To remove these offsets right click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view the trace spreadsheet Click the Trace Setup tab and then scroll to the right to the X axis and Y axis offset columns where you can delete or change these settings Click Reset Scaling to restore ALL settings to their original values Or you can use the Operations gt Stack Traces option from the shortcut menu again entering 0 for both stack parameters Align To align one chromatogram to another right click and choose Operations gt Align from the shortcut menu Click the point of the first chromatogram that you want to align to and then click the peak or point of the second chromatogram that you want aligned with the first point The second chromatogram is adjusted such that the peak or point you clicked second is aligned with the first point you clicked To remove the alignment right click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view the trace spreadsheet Click the Trace Setup tab and scroll to the right to the X axis and Y axis offset columns where you can delete or change these settings Click Reset Scaling to restore ALL settings to their original values Figure 33 Chromatograms b
52. ID Name User Name Peak Information from the peak table Project Project name and associated paths Sequence Sequence names and run numbers Repeating formula Select this box if the formula is to be repeated for a series of peaks or files Function Wizard Identification Thermo Scientific If a peak function is specified use this page to designate which peak to report e Trace index Select the trace number if multi channel files where the first trace 1 second trace 2 and so on Peak index If you select this optoin enter the peak index number for the peak of interest where the first peak 1 second peak 2 and so on Peak ID If you select this option enter the Peak ID number from the peak table for the peak of interest ChromOQuest User Guide 283 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Figure 258 Function Wizard Identification Peak page Function Wizard Identification e Using Select the check boxes for the type of peaks to include Ifa group function is specified use this page to designate which group to report 284 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Figure 259 Function Wizard Identification Group page Function Wizard Identification e Trace index Select the trace number if multi channel files where the first trace 1 second trace 2 and so on e Group index If you select this button
53. Method ws uiuie eed Seve a tuates weds he 49 Running a Preliminary Samples j0co 4 acess Poke wo ee ee eee 52 Setting Integration Parameters Graphically cocci as ceed as eee wp eve 53 Creating a Single Level Calibratiotic 03 c bers w eel ele ea he eee 55 Creating the Peak Table cane Wau Maen aes A E AN SE uation 55 Entering Peak Areas into the Method 305 5 oshand wail oie whe pets 58 Creating a Sequence Table as acAt Son deiscs Sea dp ace nnet eee aene 59 A SESTGLI Gut sae Mnl8 O19 ae iore a oP Oe E aa 66 Using The Tutorial Piles ssi sassy wc ein ie arene Sete aes 67 Reviewing Multi Level Calibration Curves 0 c eee ee eee 67 Exploring a Peak Tables prseterea ae aires ews enews ae ee 69 Examining a Custom Report 0 0 0 cece ec eee aes 70 What If Changing Integration Parametets 2 04505 200404 0ba 72 Chapter3 Method Development 0 cce cece eee eee eee eee eens 71 Creating an Acquisition Method sii tesa a wants a ota ae Sate as 78 Method Wizards deerde ane Ee wie a dee wan Peas Tikes ios 78 Instrument Setup ei ices kace ite wa Cae weer ek ed oes 80 Method Properties neiseis kat aminlinn ty a a eel a Sik st aai 84 Audit Trail Reasons essensie iere a ea uot i O hind aly lal 4 89 Data Properties igne sree eres ake high Steals e E a E E a a a a 90 Plecttonic Signatures eais E a ae bei haus ee a E E 91 Viewing the Audit Trail 0 eonuuuu uane e eaaa 92 Instrument Activity Log ian Cai aa
54. OK If you selected the option to enter a reason upon saving the method the dialog box appears when you save the method and you must enter a reason for all changes to the method Click Back and Next to view the descriptions of the changes A change item number is displayed on the lower right of the window along with the total number of changes in the method If you want to enter one reason for all changes type the reason and then click Apply to All After you have entered changes for all reasons click OK Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 89 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Data Properties The Data gt Properties command presents tabs where you can view and change the description for the current data file and turn on the audit trail for the current data file e Description The information shown in the Description box is the description currently stored in the current data file Because the description can be viewed from the Open File dialog box the description can be useful in sorting through the data files on your disk Data file descriptions can be entered in the sequence at time of data acquisition or can be entered from the Single Run dialog box when running a single sample e Audit Trail Data files always have an associated audit trail Using options on the Audit Trail page you can select whether or not you want the system to prompt you for reasons whenever a change is made Figure 93 Data F
55. Options Export Custom Parameters Performance Files Instrument Setup Baseline Check Parameters Graph Export OOOOOUUOUUOUU OK Cancel Select All Deselect All Ht Use the Trace list to select the channel or channels from which to display method information Then select the method items to display by selecting the check boxes adjacent to the desired items When finished click OK To delete a method report from the custom report template right click the table and choose Delete Table ChromQuest User Guide 247 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Calibration Reports ChromQuest provides a standard calibration report template that is used whenever you request a printout of calibration information Therefore it is not necessary to create a calibration custom report in order to print or view this information The calibration report template Calibration crp contains Calibration Information Calibration Curve and Calibration Table sections This report template can be opened using the Open button or by choosing File gt Report Template gt Open Figure 216 Method Custom Report Calibration Report window lox Arial am z B 7 u 2 alni 2 3 8 Bl fox gt aes wk ret p A 5 5 z Custom Method Report Quality Test Labs Calibration Report Peak Peak 1 ESTD PDA 254nm 750000 ANS SSSSSSSSASSSS 500000 Anumasssssssssssssssssssssssg
56. Reports iiia daima oe at a a heh tout we aC a drasa aiiai 260 Automatically Printing Sequence Reports 0 0 cerre 263 Sequence Print Adding a Sequence List to a Custom Report 263 Inserting a Sequence Calibration Report 0 00 c eee ee eee 263 OLE Object Linking and Embedding 0 00000000 264 Saving the Custom Report Templates cieonka care deed tan Vee da Ws 265 Viewing and Printing the Custom Report 0 00 e eee eee 265 Creating OC Reporters ae devecscnevea a ai ction caving tile ee hoot ana eiii 269 Sequence Spike Report wey ioveeal ees wie ahi Rea ee eH 269 Sequence Duplicate Report 30 5 aioe os alana erruna 272 Sequence Check Standard Reports sccuiwe sd copes ku ewa Ree eed weed 273 Sequence System Suitability Repott 0 00s 0 0 ew eee eee 275 vi ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Contents Advanced Reporting teisenos cohe dale e e de pw hata nee 275 Creating a new report template 0 26 a sca naaydan tains dine amp uurea 276 Inserte Tertos ea wrath Ae ary See A sie Ble alot aed EE Core Ant ity A 276 Format Gell Stylem eee mnan wares augers aes orcas ae Oat O ara 277 Define an Advanced Report Header Footer 0 000000 ee eee ee 278 Formatting the spreadsheet sedis Shot a ia ee oa ohh Ae 280 Function Wizardi ach aa Mane care BG ere Neath Ne A 281 Table Wizard ipo ha hones bone See ahha g NST 290 Addinga CNAND gar tk r benri Sw Daren Bow dees ENE ps ghey M
57. Template Name Enter or select the name of the report template file to be used to generate this report e Export Path If the report is to be exported enter or select the path for the export file to be saved 170 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating Multi Detector Methods e Export File Name Select the file naming from the types presented in the list The default file extension is txt The export file name is created using the identification selected or you can type in your own file name Figure 156 Line Number menu Line Number Sample ID User Name Method Name Instrument Name Date and Time Saving a Default Method ChromQuest loads a set of default values whenever you create a new method You can create a default method file for each instrument to include parameters that are frequently used in your laboratory To save a default method choose Method gt Save as Default The default method is called Instrument xxx Default Method met where x instrument ID For example the default method for Instrument 1005 would be Instrument 1005 Default Method met To view an instrument s ID number right click the instrument icon in the main window and choose Properties The assigned instrument ID is displayed The default method files are stored in the project method directory so you can have different default methods for each project A non instrument specific default method can also be created
58. You can change the appearance of the chromatogram and select annotations fonts and labeling Utilities are available to print the current window view copy it to a clipboard or save it in a file Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 17 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure View Tiled or Overlay Data When viewing data from multiple channel methods you can choose to view each channel in a separate window View gt Tile Data or you can overlay all channels in a single window View gt Overlay Data When all channels are overlaid in a single window you can still zoom and change the individual channel appearances as presented here When in Tiled mode you can arrange how the windows are tiled on your screen by choosing Window gt Cascade Window gt Tile Horizontally or Window gt Tile Vertically Zooming You can examine a chromatogram in more detail or zoom in on a portion of the chromatogram To do this click and drag a box around the area of interest until it highlights the entire section Then release the mouse button To move quickly to the previous level of zoom double click on the chromatogram To zoom to the full chromatogram again after multiple zooming operations right click and select Full Unzoom from the shortcut menu You can also execute a full unzoom of your chromatogram by pressing CTRL Z or holding down the SHIFT key and double clicking the chromatogram window At the top of the ch
59. a Right click the Peak Table to display a shortcut menu b Choose Properties to open the Properties dialog box c To remove a column from the Peak table clear its check box and click OK Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 69 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files Figure 72 Properties dialog box Properties x Columns Run Status Cancel Run Type Level Cone Override Custom Parameters Hel Reps P Sample ID Method Filename Sample Amt ISTD Amt Multiplier 1 Multiplier 2 Multiplier 3 Dilutor 1 Dilutor 2 Dilutor 3 Action Bt zi Set nchor Details on what each column represents along with how to customize the Peak Table are JKKK KKK KEKI given in Chapter 3 Method Development Examining a Custom Report ChromQuest comes with a complete suite of report templates that can be used without modification to generate reports To view a report 1 Open your data file by choosing File gt Data gt Open to display the Open Data File dialog box Browse to the appropriate directory Then click the appropriate data file in the list From the Method list select From Results From the Results list select the most recent date Note In the Files Of Type list select All Files if you did not add the dat extension to your data file name 2 Analyze your chromatogram to ensure th
60. a concentration override for one or more peaks in the selected calibration run This is not active unless the selected run is designated as a calibration run 206 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet Figure 184 Edit Concentration Overrides dialog box Edit Concentration Overrides Action Brings up the run action dialog box where you can specify test result action combinations for each run Figure 185 Action dialog box Action a 1 Calibration Fail Abort Conc Limit JAbove Limit Alarm E Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 207 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet e Test Select a test whose result triggers the post run action selected For each condition selected specify a result and a post run action if appropriate Available conditions include Any Calibration QC System Suitability Hardware Status Conc Limit e Result For the given test select a result from the list Results can include pass fail above limit or below limit e Actions When you select an Action you may be required to enter one or more Action Parameters for it The following Actions require no Action Parameters Abort Cancel the sequence Pause Pause the sequence and wait for the user to review and resume sequence Alarm Trigger alarm Run Shutdown On failure the sequence sear
61. a line To add a line to your report right click and choose Drawing gt Line from the shortcut menu A line appears at the location of your cursor Activate the line by clicking on it A box appears at each end of the line and the cursor changes to a You can click and drag the line handles to change its size and orientation on the page angle You can also drag and drop the line by selecting it with your mouse and dragging the line to a new location on the report Drawing a box To draw a box on your report right click and choose Drawing gt Rectangle from the shortcut menu A rectangle appears on the report where your cursor was located To size the box click it and then drag the edges to the size desired To move the box click the box to activate it and move the cursor to just outside the box where the cursor becomes 9 a Then hold down the mouse button and drag and drop the box in its new position Creating a Text Box If you want to add a box of text to your report right click and choose Drawing gt Text Box from the shortcut menu A rectangle appears with a cursor where you can type text This tool creates an independent text box in the location of your cursor To move the text box click the text box to activate it and move the cursor to just outside the text box where the cursor becomes a Hold down the mouse button and drag and drop the box in its new position Positioning Graphs Next to Tables
62. a list by clicking the File button Data file Enter the name of the file to be used to calibrate the method You can select a data file by clicking the File button adjacent to the field Print method report When this check box is selected the method reports print at the end of the analysis Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 137 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 138 ChromQuest User Guide Amount values In this section you can enter values that affect how the concentrations are calculated If you are making a single data acquisition prior to calibrating your method simply leave these values at the default level Sample amount The Sample amount value is used as a divisor during calculation of concentrations It is intended to compensate for differences between samples due to weighing and when percentages of the total sample are being calculated rather than the amount detected in an injection Internal standard amount For calibration runs the Internal standard amount is taken from the method peak table For unknown runs enter the amount of the internal standard in your unknown sample Multiplication factors Enter up to three multiplication factors to be used for this analysis calibration All quantitated peaks will be multiplied by these factors Dilution factors Enter up to three dilution factors to be used for this analysis calibration All quantitated peaks will be divided
63. and process the data This is the original method saved only when the data is acquired Because you can acquire multiple channels of data simultaneously on a given chromatograph the method section can contain complete parameters for more than one channel e Raw data points for the run saved Multiple chromatograms might be present in a single data file each of which represents a detector channel acquired for the run The raw data points are saved in binary format e Results The original integration results are saved in the file and can be recalled later when the file is opened In addition the most recent analysis results and method are also saved in the data file and updated whenever you analyze The Sample ID for the results is also saved as are manual integration fixes ChromQuest User Guide 5 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 6 e File Description If you entered a description for the file this text information is stored with the file and can be viewed under Data File Properties or from the Open Data File dialog box e Instrument Configuration The configuration of the instrument used to acquire the data file is saved e Data File Audit Trail An audit trail log is always saved in the data file that tracks analysis of the data Data files are saved using the file name and extension you specify when you initiate the data acquisition The limit on file name length is 255 characters including t
64. applications you have installed on Inserts a new 3D object into your document your computer For many selections inserting an object causes an application to run within your report editor allowing you to modify and edit the object To exit the application and return to the custom report simply click anywhere outside the object area on the report You can create a new object to insert or you can open an existing object file to insert In the example shown below a Microsoft Excel chart is being inserted as an object into the custom report When the Excel chart is inserted the menus and toolbars from Microsoft Excel become available and are active for you to edit and modify the object Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports Figure 239 Custom Report Microsoft Excel chart window Method multilevel calibration met Data multi calibration level 3 dat Custom Report E Fie Edit View Insert Format Tools Window Help E elal ARMA BA am E ee fea le olele saly selale 2l z4 aa alel me hel alr B z u s sel l i ml A Z vA 30 Z Z vA vA vA Z 25 Z vA vA Z n BJan Z 20 Z gw Feb A VA oMar Z 15 Z DApr 2 H mMay Z 10 Z BJun Z Z vA Z 5 Z vA vA vA vA vA vA A 0 y A om MIN If an OLE object such as a Microsoft Excel chart is inserted as a linked object it is updated
65. area you selected has no baselines drawn because the integration has been turned off for these peaks To view the Integration Events table click the Integration Events button on the command toolbar The integration timed events table appears Figure 56 Integration timed events table E Integration Events Detector 1 oj x L l Evet StatTime StopTime Value Ei fe width 0 2 Z Threshold i 50 Ea Integration Off i 0 aja Notice the Integration Off event has been added to the table To remove the Integration Off event from your method click the Integration Off event name or the row number and then press DELETE You can also delete the event using Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Creating a Single Level Calibration the Edit gt Cut command or reinsert the event using the Edit gt Paste command To temporarily view the effect of removing an event without actually removing it from the table click the check box adjacent to the event to deselect it To reselect the event click the check box once again 9 When you are finished viewing the Integration Events table close it and return to your chromatogram Creating a Single Level Calibration If you are interested in determining the concentration of your analytes you must set up your method for calibration See Chapter 3 Method Development for further details on how to set up multiple level calibrations In this tutorial you w
66. at a time if the report has multiple pages Zoom In Zoom Out These buttons let you zoom in for a closer look at a report or zoom out to view more of the report Zoom in functions the same way as clicking the mouse on the report when the cursor looks like a magnifying glass Close This button closes the report preview window ChromQuest User Guide 299 Index A acquisition single run 101 using sequences 212 acquisition delay 81 adding multiple traces 21 adding traces addition 42 viewing multiple chromatograms 19 advanced method options column performance page 167 custom parameters page 165 data export 164 files page 169 advanced reporting adding charts 294 cell style formatting 277 chart properties 294 cover cells 296 Function Wizard 281 grid properties 280 header and footer 278 insert text 276 new template 276 Table Wizard 290 advanced reports using the Function Wizard 281 aligning traces 36 amount values 102 analysis single level calibration 137 analyze after acquisition 86 219 analyze during acquisition 85 audit trail description 7 enable 86 printing 94 reasons 89 viewing 92 automatically average replicates 86 115 autoscale 28 Thermo Scientific average replicates 120 axis limits 32 axis ranges 28 axis setup 27 bracketed calibrations description 217 standard bracketing 217 bullets formatting 231 C calibrated range 150 calibrated range examples 157 calibrat
67. be able to scroll the spreadsheet Thermo Scientific Process Sequence Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics Use this command to process all or part of the currently displayed sequence or to open a new sequence to process This dialog box is also accessed by choosing Sequence gt Process from the menu bar Figure 181 Process Sequence dialog box Process Sequence tprise Projects D efault S equences T est4 sec J Reintegrate e Sequence information The current sequence name is displayed If you want to open a new sequence to process enter the name or select it by clicking the File button e Run range Select the range of the sequence to be run All Select this to execute all runs in the sequence Selection If you have currently selected a series of runs in your sequence spreadsheet by highlighting them click this option to run only the highlighted runs Range Enter a range of runs to be executed For example an entry of 4 6 executes runs 4 5 and 6 of the sequence An entry of 4 designates the fourth run through the end of the sequence ChromQuest User Guide 199 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics 200 ChromQuest User Guide e Mode Select the manner by which you want to handle data processing and bracketed calibration if used Tower If your instrument is configured for Dual Tower you can select the tower mode for reprocessi
68. by the Move Baseline integration timed event e A custom peak parameter has been added to the sequence table e A new Graphics Export function has been added e Overlaid traces are now normalized by default e A System Administration Report has been added e Users can be found by searching the Active Directory ChromQuest User Guide ix Preface e System Administrators can now create pre defined custom reasons for audit trails Multi level bracketed calibrations are now supported e A sequence print table is available for custom reports e A sequence run type baseline file has been added that enables you to subtract a baseline file from other runs in the sequence e A Stop Run option has been added Stop sequence after current run completes e A configurable Filtered Method Report has been added e Run Type can be selected as a field in Advanced Reports e A user configurable Sequence Contents Report is available The available fields in the Method Custom Report have been updated to include User Acquiring the Data Page break has been added to the custom report editor e In the PDA software you can specify a wavelength to designate a chromatogram to be used as a baseline subtraction chromatogram for other chromatograms extracted from the 3D data Related Documentation In addition to this guide Thermo Fisher Scientific provides the following documents for the ChromQuest chromatography data system ChromQuest 5 0 I
69. by these factors Calibrate Select this check box to trigger calibration Once this check box is selected the following fields and options become available Calibration level Enter the number of the calibration level represented by the stored calibration standard If this is a single level calibration enter 1 Clear all calibration Select this check box if you want to clear all existing calibration factors from your method before running the calibration Clear calibration for level Select this check box if you want to clear the existing response factors for this level only before running the calibration Print calibration report Select this check box if you want to print a calibration report after running the calibration Thermo Scientific Clear replicates 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Select this check box if you want to clear existing replicates from this level before running the calibration Average replicates Select this check box if you want to average replicates for this calibration level When you have completed the dialog box entries click Start ChromQuest opens the stored data file and uses the areas for calibrated peaks to update the specified method Reviewing Calibration Curves After you have completed running all of the calibration standards for your method you can review the calibration curve and associated data by choosing Method gt Review Calibration
70. calibration the areas heights for each replicate replaces the area height for the previous replicate in the calibration Only the most recent replicate areas heights are used to create the calibration curve Previous replicates are ignored If you choose Wt Average each calibration point on the curve is determined by performing the average of the current calibration with previous replicate areas heights in the method The following example describes how this is done Assume a starting method for a single level calibration with no existing calibration data After a series of n calibration replicate samples are run the calibration curve is determined as shown below Level 1 Replicate Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area3 n Arean Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 113 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 150000 100000 Area 0 5 10 15 20 Amount The resulting calibration curve is shown above with the point x y representing the calibration point for Level 1 The area y of this point is calculated by taking the average of the replicates at this level _ afeai area2 arean n This average y is saved as the last area in the method This value is used to calculate the weighted average when a new series of replicates for this level is run as shown below Level 1 Replicate Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area3 m Area Because this is the second time a series of replicates was run for this level a weighted average i
71. choose Graphical Programming gt Define Group from the shortcut menu You are prompted on the status bar to click the mouse to define group regions Click once at the beginning and once at the end of the region of peaks that you wish to add to the group You can continue to add groups by clicking to define the group regions When you are done defining the group regions press the ESC key A dialog box appears where you further define the group Figure 134 Define Groups dialog box Define Groups x Group Name Chlorinated Compounds Group Type Uncalibrated Range x Quantitate group on Jess ISTD ID fe Ref ID fo Units Include Named Peaks OK x Cancel aes Help e Group Name Type a name to be assigned to this group e Group Type Select the type of group you want to define Uncalibrated Range Select this type if you want to define a group comprised of uncalibrated peaks eluting within a designated time range You must enter a manual response factor RF in the Group table that will be used to determine the concentration of peaks in the group range Results are reported as individual uncalibrated peaks that fall within the range where the concentrations are calculated based on the manual response factor entered for the Uncalibrated Range group Thermo Scientific Group Table Properties Calibrated Range 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Select this type
72. data on more than one Analysis Channel from a single detector if your instrument contains one of the following detectors e SpectraSYSTEM UV2000 dual wavelength detector e SpectraSYSTEM UV3000 triple wavelength and scanning detector e SpectraSYSTEM UV6000 photo diode array detector e Surveyor UV Vis dual wavelength detector e Surveyor PDA detector e Surveyor PDA Plus detector There is one Peak table and one Column Performance dialog box per detector This means that you enter your peak identification and quantitation parameters in one Peak table and you enter your column performance parameters for system suitability testing in one Column Performance dialog box If you want to quantitate a peak on a second Analysis Channel you must enter the peak information in a second row of the Peak table and then select the appropriate Analysis Channel in the Analysis Channel column There is one Integration Events table for each discrete wavelength and multi chromatogram wavelength listed in the Instrument Setup and the Multi Chromatogram sections of the method To edit an Integration Events table select the appropriate channel from the Analysis Channel list Then click the Integration Events Table button Before you edit the table size it click the Restore Down button so that you can see its title bar The Wavelength field in the title bar of the Integration Events Table dialog box indicates which table you have open When you set up your custo
73. define what data are to be displayed and the source of the data as well as for application of mathematical formulas Functions do not appear on the spreadsheet unless they are being edited To view the function in a cell double click that cell The results of defined functions do not appear on the spreadsheet but appear in Print Preview or when the report is printed provided the data is available for the function to work For example sequence summary tables do not contain valid data until after a sequence has been acquired and processed or reprocessed ChromQuest User Guide 281 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Dynamic Data In cases where data is not available for the function to work on an error might be displayed on your spreadsheet If this happens click OK to close the error then click Print Preview If the function is technically correct but has no data available no error messages appear on the print preview If an error message appears on the print preview your function has not been entered correctly Detailed descriptions of all functions available in the Advanced Reporting application are beyond the scope of this manual For a complete list of these functions see the Guide to Advanced Template Reporting doc file available in the Manual folder of the ChromQuest CD When Advanced Report is used to display dynamic data such as data from a sequence of runs or peaks from every run where the number of peaks can change th
74. duplicate reports If the percent relative difference falls above this value the sample fails RF RSD Limit Enter the percent relative standard deviation for calibration response factors When a Calib Start and Calib End are designated in the sequence table this value is used to determine whether the calibration passes or fails If you are not using one or more of the parameters presented in the peak table you can remove it from view by right clicking and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu When you select this command a dialog box appears where you can select the columns that you want to appear in the peak table Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Figure 126 Properties dialog box Properties EI Columns Cancel Ret Time Window Hel Ref ID ka ISTD ID Resolution ID Units RT Update LOD LOO Quantitate Fit Type Zero Calib Flag Calib Weight KKE KKK lt lt SNR I Calib Margin Cicala Set Anchor Columns with a check mark are displayed in the peak table spreadsheet Those without a check are not displayed To enter a maximum number of Levels to be displayed double click on the Maximum Levels text A box appears where you can enter the number of calibration levels you want to have displayed in the peak table Type the number of levels
75. editing a calibration report template If you select this option within a method report template the information will not be printed If you select Template calibration curves for all peaks in the calibration are automatically printed as defined in the crp calibration report template file e View replicate points Select this check box if you want replicate data points to be displayed on the report calibration curve 3 Click on OK to enter the calibration curve into your custom report Adding Calibration Information to a Custom Report ChromQuest User Guide You can add just the calibration information into your custom report using the right mouse click Insert Report gt Calibration Info command When you select this command a dialog will appear where you can specify what information to show Figure 219 Calibration Info Setup dialog box Calibration Info Setup Ed Calibration data source Source Trace Detector Peak Peak1 z Cancel Help e Calibration data source Select where you want the data for the calibration information to come from Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Source Select the source of the calibration information from the Calibration Data Source Source drop down list Select Peaks or Groups to select what calibration peak table to use Trace Select the specific data to be displayed Select a data channel fo
76. for the new tab A numeric tab stop aligns the tabbed text to the decimal point Sequence Custom Reports A sequence custom report is normally created and saved as part of developing a sequence Sequence reports differ from method custom reports in that they report information generated as a result of running a sequence of runs instead of just a single run Examples of sequence reports include sequence summary reports and sequence QC reports Because the report template used in a sequence custom report contains information that is relative only to a sequence it is created using the Sequence Custom Report editor To access the Sequence Custom Report editor choose Sequence gt Custom Report from the menu bar A custom report window opens with a blank page where you create your report or the current sequence custom report template appears Figure 199 Sequence Custom Report window E Sequence Custom Report jol x Courier New z fio x B7U 4R 2z22 Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 229 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports If you are familiar with using Microsoft Word you will quickly become familiar with using the Sequence Custom Report generator A number of features in this window are noteworthy e A ruler that shows position relative to the page Margins and indents are indicated by black arrows that can be dragged to suit your need e A toolbar that contains frequently used commands for formatting
77. if you want to create a group that will be calibrated as if it were one peak See Group Calibration Calibrated Range on page 150 for details Named Peaks Select this type if you want to create a group comprised of named calibrated peaks from the peak table The group amount is the sum of the amounts of individually calibrated peaks defined in the group See Calibrated Peak Grouping Named Peaks on page 160 for details To view the Group table click the Peak Group Tables button from the toolbar A tab box appears with the Named Peaks tab on top Click the Groups tab to view the Group table Each group region defined appears as one row in the spreadsheet To customize the columns displayed in the Group table right click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu The Properties dialog box appears Figure 135 Properties dialog box Properties El Columns Name lt j Ref ID ISTD ID Group Type Group Def Units Quantitate Fit Type Zero Calib Flag Calib Weight Calib Margin Scale Weighting Method 10 Levels STD ID STD Mult FIR sere OC v v JEKK EK i mu Help Set Anchor For the columns you want displayed select the corresponding check boxes To change the number of calibration levels displayed double click the Levels text A box appears whe
78. is used to enter the maximum number of recent files to display when you choose File gt Recent Method Files Method Files Data Files Sequence Files Pretreatment Files Select the file type and then enter the number of files you wish to display in the Max files box Click Clear Files to clear the max files number for the selected file type Click Clear All Files to clear the max files for all file types Figure 13 Preferences dialog box Files page Preferences Ed General Files Recent files Manx files 5 Recent Data Files Recent Sequence Files P Recent Pretreatment Files Bealile Clear All Files Cancel Help Throughout ChromQuest you can right click or the opposite if you have switched the main mouse button for left handed use to access a shortcut menu for that region of the application window For example a right click executed inside the chromatogram window brings up a menu where you can set the properties of the chromatogram window and access other chromatogram operations When you choose Window gt Lock all menu items are Locked except the Window and Help menu Locked commands are not accessible until you unlock them again This command is useful for multiple user labs where you might want to lock your current work while you are temporarily away from the computer To unlock the screen choose Window gt Lock again You are required to log on with your user name and password to unlock
79. only to this sample and not become a regular part of the method integration Figure 112 Width dialog box Width Start Time 353 Minutes Add to Table Stop Time 3 74 Minutes Cancel Value fo 209245 Help Insert into Integration Events table C Insert into Manual Integration Fixes table Analyze Now Graphically Setting Threshold Set the threshold using Graphical Programming next This time instead of using the shortcut menu click the Threshold button on the integration toolbar As instructed in the status bar at the bottom of the window click the mouse once at the beginning of a section of your chromatogram where no peaks elute then once again at the end of that section of chromatogram ChromQuest will suggest a threshold value Select Analyze Now to add the value to your method and reintegrate the chromatogram Suggest Sampling Frequency Thermo Scientific Optimization of your sampling frequency can also be assigned graphically Click the Sample Frequency button or right click and choose Graphical Programming gt Suggest Sampling Frequency Following the instructions on the status bar click once at the beginning of your narrowest peak of interest and then once at the end of that peak ChromQuest suggests a sampling rate or period for acquisition of the sample You can enter this value for your sampling rate using the Instrument Setup button ChromQuest User Guide 109 3 Method Development Integrating
80. opens with either a blank page where you will create your report or the current method custom report If you are familiar with using Microsoft Word you will quickly become familiar with using the ChromQuest Custom Report generator A number of features in this window are noteworthy e A ruler that shows position relative to the page Black arrows that can be dragged to suit your needs indicate margins and indents e A toolbar that contains frequently used command buttons for formatting These buttons include bold italic underline strike through color left justify center right justify view header footer add buttons borders shading and zoom When clicked the formatting represented by these buttons is applied to any text or item currently selected Once you click a formatting button the formatting remains in effect for new text until you click the button again e Right mouse click access to menus for inserting chromatograms report objects chromatography method information and electronic results signoff fields e Items inserted into the report must first be activated by clicking on them in order to edit or move them e Report tables can be removed quickly with a right mouse click inside the table and then by choosing Delete Table ChromQuest User Guide 227 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 228 Your custom report can be generated by creating a new report or by modifying an existing report You can o
81. or sequence run The following example demonstrates how replicates are treated during a calibration sequence using automatic averaging 1 As each run is analyzed the area for each named peak is saved in the method as the current area At the end of Run 3 a true average is calculated from replicates for Runs 1 through 3 for Level 1 This value is the calibration area height for this level 2 At Run 4 the calibration for Level 2 begins Replicates for Level 2 are saved for runs 4 5 and 6 3 At the end of Run 6 the replicates for Level 2 are averaged and used to calculate the calibration point for Level 2 This area height is saved as Last Area for Level 2 116 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 4 At the beginning of Run 7 the existing replicates for Level 1 are cleared and new Level 1 replicates are saved for Run 7 and Run 8 5 At the end of Run 8 the existing calibration area height becomes the Last Area the true average of Runs 7 and 8 is calculated and a weighted average is calculated using this value and the Last Area see calculation in Calib Weight section Note that if the Calib Weight is set to 100 the Last Area value is not taken into account Figure 118 Sequence window Bunt Stes RunType Level Sample Method 1 Test01 Attilevel calibration met Calibration 1 Test02 multilevel calibration met Calibration 1 Test03 multilevel calibration me
82. point is saved in the data file However no analysis of the data is performed If you want to produce a report or view results from a run that was stopped you must Analyze the data file 2 If you are not the user that submitted the run or sequence or are using an instrument offline you do not have access to the Stop command Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 45 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Extend Run While a run is in progress you can extend the data acquisition beyond the designated run time by choosing Control gt Extend Run When you select this command a dialog box appears where you can enter the amount of time that you want to extend the run by Figure 48 Expand Run dialog box Extend Run Extend run by E Minutes Type the number of minutes to extend the run by and then click OK Note If you are not the user that submitted the run or sequence or are using an instrument offline you do not have access to the Extend Run command 46 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Tutorial Thermo Scientific This chapter walks you through the basics of using ChromQuest Follow the steps to set up a method and acquire a data file Then optimize the method for integration and set up a calibration Use the Tutorial files provided with ChromQuest to play with the software and become comfortable with its features Note This Tutorial assumes that ChromQuest is installed wit
83. putting a graph next to a report table 258 report items 226 report properties 258 run report 253 run report properties 254 saving a custom report template 265 scrolling the chromatogram 243 setting default font 231 setting default margins 232 setting justification 231 short cuts 228 templates 226 viewing and printing the custom report 265 zooming 243 data acquisition and control 44 data acquisition without processing 219 data export 164 data file description 90 data files opening 8 preview chromatogram 8 302 ChromQuest User Guide saving 11 data properties description 90 data source 20 30 default methods 171 defining a group 146 defining peaks 126 defining peaks in range 126 defining single peak 124 deleting report tables 230 derivatives 41 dividing traces 43 E electronic signatures 91 enable audit trail 87 F file structure data file structure 5 method file structure 4 fill down command 197 Function Wizard data direction 287 dynamic data 286 identification 283 overview 281 select function 282 types 288 G GLP 6 graph annotations 28 grid 28 legend 28 margins 28 orientation 28 graphical programming 44 107 group range definition 156 group table 153 group table properties 147 groups calibrate range examples 157 calibrated peak grouping 160 calibrated range 150 group calibration 150 named peaks 160 peak group definition 162 reporting group amounts 163 uncalibrated range 148 Thermo Scientific
84. report J Average replicates m Amount values Sample amount SS Internal standard amount Multiplication factors zz z Begin tun Dilution factors il a I il rme Q m Autosampler P Use program SS N Vial fad Injection volume a pe J Baseline Check Tower NA z Description Type an identifying label for your sample in the Sample ID box If the method you created is not listed in the Method box browse to an appropriate method by clicking the Open file button adjacent to the box In the Data Path box type a path for storage of data files or browse to an appropriate directory by clicking the Open file button adjacent to the box In the Data file box a Type Test b Place your cursor at the end of the data file name Press the spacebar Click the blue arrow to the right of the Data File box Then choose Increment Number from the pop up menu Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard You must enter a unique file name in this field Therefore if you have performed this tutorial before you must first delete this file from your disk or move it to a different directory before proceeding 6 Leave the Amount Values at their default values of 1 See Single Run Acquisition on page 101 for more details 7 Click Start to begin your run You see the data as it is acquired in the chromatogram window on your screen S
85. sive ew ee nie cle Ces Rae 96 Instrument Activity Log Manual Entry ink racic Boils tee Nis 97 Instrument Activity Log Export 00 cee eee eee eee 98 Instrument Activity Log Archive s oi sinc eu eee diled te wed eee ees 99 Instrument Activity Log Purge 0 eee eee eee 99 Save Method Asesino i icia a akg Meteo A E i a a Sa a 100 Single Run Acquisition seoses soe seio pee wea ia n E ke ER 101 Stopping a Run in Progress 0 eee eee 104 Baseline Check On Demand sod iit seers tha Red eh eRe RA AE MES aes 105 Integrating the Chromatogram 0 05 3 eee aged ek ee ns ak ate ee a wk 107 Basics of Integration Required Integration Events 0 107 Sampling Rave sennoina boca manna ah ast ea aratalaw deat ated ehenoaged 107 Graphical Integration Optimization 0 0 00 00 cece eee eee 107 iv ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Contents Calibration SEEM Pant eerta dente a diet a tare hon breton dat eta Dba ek 111 Calibration TNE OLY ier iuti core ie auotaan aeai iie a aden de aate a Het stay 111 Replicates and Averaging Calibrations osc 04 ties Web dan ae ee 113 Steps for Creating a Galibtationis2ciecaco edi es ee tae Re 121 Creating Calibrations Graphically 0s 0s aves pee tek epee ted weeks 122 Peak Tables m 5 ites ant hari a hain Gade Ba eine aes 128 Calibrating Your Method Running Calibration Samples 136 Single Level Calibration Using a Stored Data File 0 136 Reviewing Calib
86. the Chromatogram Adding and deleting integration timed events All of the integration timed events available in ChromQuest can be added to your method using the Graphical Programming technique Each time you add an event it is stored in the Integration Timed Events table or Manual Integration Fixes table To view the Integration Events table click the Integration Events button or choose Method gt Integration Events from the main menu Figure 113 Integration Events window E Integration Events Detector A tf Event Stat Time _ Stop Tine oo ae a min Sensitivity BH width El Each row of the Integration Events spreadsheet represents an integration event in the method To manually add an event click an empty row in the Event column Select the event to enter from the drop down list then enter a Start Time Stop Time and Value if applicable for the event You can temporarily remove an event from the table by clearing the check mark adjacent to the event When the check mark is not displayed the event is not applied to the integration To permanently delete an integration event right click the row of the event to select it and choose Cut from the shortcut menu Figure 114 Integration Events window Options menu E Integration Events Detector A tf Evatt Stet Time _ _ _Stop Time doo ae Cut Copy Paste Insert Paste Insert Line Clear Clear All Select All The event is cut from
87. the average forward Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Calibration Averaging as Part of a Single Run or Sequence Whether or not you are doing Automatic Calibration Averaging you can designate averaging at the start of a single run or as part of the Run Type of a sequence entry The Single Run dialog box has check boxes for you to specify how you want to treat the calibration replicates If you select the Average Replicate check box the replicates are averaged and the average is used in conjunction with the Calib Weight and Calib Flag to calculate a new calibration point Figure 120 Single Run Acquisition dialog box Single Run Acquisition fer TC Freee PopciADeautWethod anne met D eremie Fiapo Deess fara ee al For a sequence calibration averaging is designated as part of a run s Run Type Click the Run Type field from the sequence spreadsheet to view the Run Type dialog box Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 119 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 120 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 121 Sample Run Types dialog box Sample Run Type s JU OU Clear Calibration at Level C Print Calibration Report JAverage Replicates Clear All Calibration Clear Replicates Begin Loop End Loop Shutdown Print Additional Reports Begin System Suitability System Suitability Standard End System Suitability Begin Summary Summary Run End Summary Vial Sum
88. the first detected peak in the chromatogram Figure 124 Define Single Peak dialog box Define Single Peak acetone i IULeS e Retention Time The retention time of the first detected peak appears If you want to add this peak to the peak table complete the dialog box for this peak If you do not wish to add this peak to the peak table click Next If you want to move to a specific peak in the chromatogram click that peak with your mouse The retention time shown in the dialog box changes to reflect the selected peak e Peak Name Type the name of the compound in this field e Conc Level Concentration Level 1 is shown Type the amount of this compound for this concentration level If you are running more than one level for this compound enter Concentration Level 2 and the amount for that level Continue to enter level concentrations until you have completed the number of calibration levels desired You can also enter or edit concentration level amounts from the method peak table e Units Enter the units to be used for display of results Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup e ISTDID If you are doing internal standard calibration enter the ID for the internal standard peak for this compound This is the peak ID number from the peak table If you don t know it you can add it in the peak table later e Resolution ID Enter a peak ID to be used for calcul
89. the list If you change your mind you can reenter the event using the Paste command You can also use the shortcut menu to insert a line clear a selected cell or row Clear all events or select all events 110 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup For a complete list of integration events along with examples of how they work refer to Chapter 1 in the ChromQuest 5 0 Reference Guide Manual Integration Fixes A manual integration fix is an adjustment to integration required only for a particular chromatogram Manual integration corrections that are created using graphical integration are logged into the Manual Integration Fixes table These manual changes can also be entered in the Manual Integration Fixes table by selecting the desired integration change from the drop down list then entering a Start and Stop time and a Value if appropriate These integration changes are applied only to an individual chromatogram rather than becoming part of the method and are saved in the data file only The Manual Integration Fixes are saved in the data file so that the integration of the chromatogram can be recreated later When you choose Data gt Manual Integration Fixes or click the Manual Integration Fixes Table button the Manual Integration Fixes table appears where you can view or edit the current manual integration events Figure 115 Manual Integration Fixes window E Manual Integration Fixes
90. the log has not been archived when you click either Yes or No If you have not set the enterprise options such that a purge is only allowed after archive you are presented the Instrument Activity Archive dialog box if you click Yes If you click No the instrument activity log is purged ChromQuest User Guide 99 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Save Method As When you have completed the sections for creation of a data acquisition method save the file on your hard disk before you use it for data acquisition To save the method click Save followed by Method or select File gt Method gt Save As from the menu bar A dialog box appears where you can give your method a distinctive name and designate a disk folder directory where it is saved Figure 107 Save method file as dialog box Save method file as Sy Methods multilevel calibration met new column met system2 met multilevel calibration met Method files met B Multilevel Calibration Method Select the directory where you want to save the method Type the name of the new method in the File Name field You can review and change the method description using the Description box To save the method click Save You are now ready to use your method for data acquisition 100 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Single Run Acquisition Single Run Acquisition Thermo Scientific Th
91. the screen Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Figure 14 Unlock Window dialog box Unlock Window 9 User name wh Password The Chromatogram Window Whenever there is data to be viewed it is shown in a chromatogram window Normally one chromatogram appears in each window and multiple channel data files display multiple chromatogram windows one for each channel However it is possible to add multiple traces to a single chromatogram window and perform comparison and mathematical operations on them To access specialized commands for the chromatogram window right click the chromatogram window Through the shortcut menu options you can add graphs or chromatograms to the window change the appearance annotations and axes perform mathematical operations on chromatograms and view or change the properties of existing traces in the window Figure 15 Chromatogram window E Channel A olx Time 6 61672 Minutes Amplitude 0 042236 Volts _ Channel amp PNA STDS Retention Time Add Trace Name Add Multiple Traces 8 273 Peak3 Annotations Appearance Full Unzoom Clear Overlays Axis Setup Operations Utiities Graphical Programming gt 3 6 Peak2 5 739 Peak1 6 59 As data is being acquired it is also displayed in a chromatogram window At the end of a run the data becomes the current data
92. to remain in the desired state Duration and the State of the event during the event select Close or Open You can configure up to 25 events for the run ChromQuest User Guide 95 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Instrument Status Event Direct Control If you are using external events you can directly access and control the configured events using the Control gt Instrument Status command When you select this command in an instrument where events are configured a window appears where you can view the current state of the event and manually change it The tabs in instrument status are dependent on instrument configuration so that what you see may differ from this general case Figure 100 Instrument Status dialog box External Events page E Instrument Status oj x External Events l Hame Status Change To vi Open On the External Events page each configured event is displayed on a line along with its current Status To change the status click the box displayed in the Change To column Each time you click the mouse the Change To state switches When you have selected the appropriate state click Apply The Status is updated to reflect the change If Ignore is selected in the Change To field for an event pressing Apply does not change that event Instrument Activity Log As you use a method to acquire data a log of activity from the current instrument is kept To view this log choose F
93. to select the start and then the apex of a peak in the first trace Then you are prompted to click the start and apex of a peak in the second trace for normalization To undo the normalization right click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view the trace spreadsheet Click the Trace Setup tab and then scroll to the right to the X axis and Y axis offset columns where you can delete or change these settings Click Reset Scaling to restore ALL settings to their original values Figure 37 Chromatograms before normalization E Channel A of x Retention Time Figure 38 Chromatogram after normalization E Channel A olx Time 7 20069 Minutes Amplitude 0 00127 448 Retentipn Time 38 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Mathematical Operations You can perform mathematical operations on traces from within the chromatogram window In general mathematical operations involve selecting the appropriate option from the Operations shortcut menu such as Add or Subtract then following the instructions in the upper right corner of the chromatogram window to click on the desired traces in the window on which you wish to perform the operation To click a trace move the cursor so that any part of the cursor cross hairs is on the trace A result trace appears in the window at the end of the operation For example to add two traces right cli
94. view the results When you click Description you can enter a text description for the sample that is saved in the data file The description can be viewed from the Open File dialog box or when the file is open as the current data file by choosing Data gt Properties This button appears when data is currently being acquired using a sequence or single run With the Submit button you can submit a single acquisition to be run at the completion of the current run The run is entered at the end of the Run Queue if you are currently running a sequence of runs ChromQuest User Guide 103 3 Method Development Single Run Acquisition Submit Priority This button appears when data is currently being acquired using a sequence When you click Submit Priority you can submit the single run to be executed immediately after the current sequence run record in the Run Queue After this sample is finished the sequence resumes Note If the chromatogram is not integrated at the end of the run or if you were expecting a report and none was printed check the Method gt Properties section of your method to make sure data analysis is turned on for this method Stopping a Run in Progress When you want to stop data acquisition during a run click the Stop button that appears in the toolbar when the run is in progress or choose Control gt Stop Run A dialog box appears that presents the following options for how you want to stop the run Note When clicki
95. 0 o 3 8 oO S 38 5 H o H 5 60 z S 2 60 3 T 8 S T E 2 2 2 E N 3 m s oe 40 H 5 40 v R 20 ary 20 0 i 0 Integration ib 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 popan Minutes PAREKRANYANM AAD TO AAAMNNAA AW ThA AM e For Help press F1 MIN 4 Status bar 14 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure View Preferences Choose View gt Preferences to access the appearance features The following dialog box appears Preferences General This page is used to set up general preferences in the instrument window e Toolbar options For each area of the window listed you can turn on or off the Toolbar and Tooltips if available Click the toolbar area and then select the Show toolbar and Tooltips boxes to enable your choices for that area Figure 12 Preferences dialog box General page Preferences Sequence Pause Method e Status bar options Select the check box to turn on the status bar The status bar provides brief information at the bottom of the instrument window e Time units Select the time units for display of chromatographic information e Tooltips options Select these check boxes to show the tooltips Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 15 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 16 View Preferences Files Right mouse clicks Locking your screen ChromOQuest User Guide The Files page
96. 128 Peak Table ChromQuest User Guide A spreadsheet view of the peak table appears with the retention time of each peak in the selected peak range displayed Complete the peak table for each calibrated compound as described in the next section All of the information required to calculate concentrations for unknown peaks using a calibration is contained in the peak table Each row of the peak table represents one of the calibrated components Once you have graphically entered the peaks into the peak table you must complete the peak table with information required to correctly identify and calculate unknown concentrations for each peak You might not need to use all the columns of the spreadsheet Enter information only for columns that are required for calculation of amounts for each peak of interest Note Once you have become familiar with the parameter columns in the peak table you can customize the appearance of the table to only display the columns of interest to you by right clicking the table and selecting Properties Calibrated Peak Parameters The following columns in the peak table are used for calculating results for calibrated peaks Row number e Name Type the name of the component that matches the retention time displayed e ID ChromQuest automatically assigns a peak ID for each peak starting with 1 This ID is used to designate reference peak and internal standard peak number If you are adding peaks to an existing
97. 53420 Board 0 nO State Closed Detector Narre Detector A Charmel A Detector Model Analog Acquistion Source 55420 Board 1 Analog put Chan A Y Axis Units Volts Y Axis Ih kiplier 000 Inserting a Method Audit Trail Report You can insert a listing of the current method s Audit trail by right clicking and choosing Insert Report gt Method Audit Trail A table template for the audit trail report is inserted on your custom report template This table is a template placeholder and does not display the actual audit trail report until the custom report is printed Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 259 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports 260 Figure 231 Audit trail report table template i User i Logged i Source 0 Activity oo REASON n Demo O1N02499 What was changed Whyit was changed i 12 34 56 and how i SecescscssoseosossessAcosossossoscososesssoseoseAosesssseso PE csososossssossssssseAssecessossesososossosossossoososssscssesAsosossessessessossssossossossosossoseos Electronic Signatures in Custom Reports To add an electronic signature table to your report right click the report and choose Insert Report gt Electronic Signatures Table This command inserts a table that contains the electronic signatures for this data file into your report Figure 232 Electronic Signatures in Custom Reports window Surveyor System 2 Method Polyaromatics met Data U is365nm1 0minutes levell a Rep3 dat Pre
98. 7 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Integration Events Named Peaks P Named Peaks Named Peaks Named Peaks Named Peaks Named Peaks Named Peaks Named Peaks Named Peaks Pi Pi Posi Ress Piss Pi Pes Piss Added Enabled Yes Type Width Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Calibration Flag changed from Repla Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Calibration Flag changed from Repla Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Calibration Flag changed from Repla Expected Retention Time changed tr Calibration Weight changed from 0 to Calibration Flag changed from Repla Width c Averag Averag Averag Averag Averag Averag Averag Averag Averag To see full information for a logged change print one of the entries or print all the entries click a row to highlight it and then right click Figure 97 Method Audit Trail window Show Detail menu E Method Audit Trail OF x System System System System System System System System System 4 3 97 10 17 21 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Show Detail Named Named Named Peaks F Named Peaks Named Peaks P Named Peaks Named Peaks P Named Peaks Named Peaks P
99. 780 1 796923 19923 075 19965 04 1000000 External Standard Curve Average RF 20213 7 RF StDev 863 199 500000 RF ZRSD 4 27036 Area Scaling None LSQ Weighting None Force Through Zero On 0 Replicate Mode Replace 0 20 40 Amount Point to Point Fit xl The Review Peak Calibration window contains the following information e A table that includes information about the concentrations of the calibration standards and the peak areas generated by running the calibration standards e A list of the named peaks in the Peak table A work tablet that contains information about the calibration curve e A graphical display of the calibration curve When you click a peak name its calibration information is shown in the bottom half of the window The calibration curve fit type by default is Point to Point To overlay a different fit type right click the calibration curve box to open the shortcut menu Choose Change Fit Type gt Linear Notice the new linear calibration curve is overlaid on the Point to Point curve For additional details on using Review Calibration see Chapter 3 Method Development To close the window click the X box at the upper right corner of the Review Calibration window Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files Exploring a Peak Table The Peak Table includes information about the calibration standards check standards and spike amounts In this section y
100. 9 97 12 11 47 Analysis Analysis Analysis Audit Trail MEE Updated last results Method used D Updated last results Method used D Updated last results Method used D Enabled Data Audit Trail To see full information for a logged change print one of the entries or print all the entries click a row to highlight it and then right click e Show Detail Select this option to view full information on the selected activity Print All Select this option to print all of the audit trail entries e Print Selection Select this to print only the highlighted entry 94 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific External Events Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Once you have configured external events for your instrument you can program the events for your method using the External Events tab in Method gt Instrument Setup Note that this tab does not appear on your menu unless you have configured external events for your instrument When you select this tab a spreadsheet appears where you can select the events and designate when and how they activate during the run Figure 99 Instrument Setup dialog box External Events page E Instrument Setup BF ewendeves Ode tom eo To program an event click the Event column and select from the list of configured events Enter the time at which the event is to actuate the length of time you wish the event
101. ChromQuest User Guide 257 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 258 Show Report Data at Design Time Delete Table Report Properties By default ChromQuest displays template fields when you create report tables in a custom report without the actual data displayed To view the actual data right click and choose Print Preview from the shortcut menu If you prefer to always view the report table data as you develop your custom report choose the Show Data at Design Time option When this is enabled the data for the report table is always displayed This command removes the current table from the custom report template This option brings up the Run Report dialog box You can use it to redefine or add items to your report Placing a Graph Next to a Report ChromQuest User Guide 1 bd To insert a chromatogram or other graph adjacent to a report on your custom report template Draw a text box on your report right click and choose Drawing gt Text Box Figure 228 Graph placed next to a report Right click the text box and choose Insert Graph gt Data Graph to insert a chromatogram or other graph into the box To move the text box with the chromatogram graph inside click the border of the text box until the black rectangular handles appear Then move the cursor just outside the border until the cursor turns to a crosshair Hold down the left mouse button and drag the t
102. Comma Float Fixed Fixed Mixed Fraction Retuns the cell to the default format based on the style of the column and row it is in System Time Floating Word wrap Normal DD MMM YY DD MMM Overflow indicator Elipsis 7 DD MM YYYY S DD x Cancel Help Select the desired cell style in the Category list Based on your selection fields on the right might become active to further define the cell style e Decimal places Enter the number of decimal places to be displayed for numeric data Floating If this is selected text or numeric data that exceeds the width of the cell automatically floats into the next cell if empty If this selection is Off the text or data that extends beyond the limits of the cell width is either truncated or displayed with an overflow indicator selected e Overflow indicator Select the way cells that overflow are to be displayed with no indicator with an ellipsis for example cell overflow is or with a pound sign e Word wrap When this option is selected information entered into a cell is wrapped to the next line when coming to the end of the cell e Normal When this button is selected information is displayed in the default mode ChromQuest User Guide 271 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting 278 Define an Advanced Report Header Footer ChromQuest User Guide To define the header and or footer for the report right
103. D ata Cancel Apply Help Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 209 4 Sequence Operations Setting the Sequence Properties e Description Type a text description of the sequence if desired The description is saved in the sequence file and can be viewed from the Open Sequence dialog box e Export summary Select this option to export the summary report Enter the path where you want the summary text file to be saved The summary is exported to a file entitled Sequence Summary 000005000 txt Where the numbers represent nBatchTower nReportRunTypeID nReportNumber e File paths Select default paths to be used for methods data and autosampler if appropriate You can select a path from those available on the disk by clicking the File button adjacent to the field These paths are used in the event that a file is specified in the sequence table without a path e Print Sequence Reports Select this option to enable the printing of sequence reports during the running or reprocessing of a sequence 210 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Enabling the Sequence Audit Trail Enabling the Sequence Audit Trail To enable the audit trail for sequences choose Sequence gt Properties from the menu bar Then click the Audit Trail tab Note Once the Enable Audit Trail option is selected it cannot be cleared The sequence continues to have audit trail enabled unless you
104. N or OFF display of the trace or the legend ChromQuest User Guide 237 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 238 ChromQuest User Guide Scale to Select one of the scaling options Note that these work only after the trace has been analyzed Trace x Scales to another trace in the window Autoscale to largest peak Scales such that the largest peak is on scale Autoscale to 2nd largest peak Scales such that the 2 largest peak is on scale Autoscale to 3rd largest peak Scales such that the 34 largest peak is on scale User Defined Allows you to enter a value for Y max and min Normalized Allows you to normalize one trace to fit on the graph Y min If you have selected a User Defined scale enter a minimum value for the Y axis Y max If you have selected a User Defined scale enter a maximum value for the Y axis Units Enter the units for display Annotation Select the items you wish to have displayed as annotations on the graph X offset Enter a value in units for offset of the X axis Y offset Enter a value in units for offset of the Y axis X scale Enter a multiplier which will be applied to the X Axis if desired Y scale If desired enter a Y scale multiplier which will be applied to the entire trace Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports e Reset Scaling This button resets the scaling items in the trace setup tab to their default values You ca
105. Quest Projects Default Methods multile E e Data File Type Select the appropriate Data File Type option For acquisition Enables you to designate new file names to be used for acquisition From existing data files Enables you to select the data file names from a list of existing data files from your data directory This is normally used to create a sequence to be used for reprocessing See Creating a Reprocessing Sequence on page 191 for details Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 181 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard e Amount values In this section you can enter values that affect how the concentrations of unknown samples are calculated Sample amount The sample amount value is used as a divisor during calculation of concentrations It is intended to compensate for differences between samples due to weighing and when percentages of the total sample are being calculated rather than the amount detected in an injection Internal standard amount For calibration runs the internal standard amount is taken from the method peak table For unknown runs enter the amount of the internal standard in your unknown sample Multiplication factors Enter up to three multiplication factors to be used for these runs All quantitated peaks are multiplied by these factors Dilution factors Enter up to three dilution factors to be used for these runs All q
106. Renumbering Peak ID s might require items identified by Peak ID in custom parameters or custom reports to be redefined using the new Peak ID s Calibrating Your Method Running Calibration Samples Once the method is set up for calibration the calibration is not completed until the areas for peaks in the standard samples are entered into the method Updating the method with these areas is called calibration or calibrating the method Calibration can be performed by updating the calibration in the method automatically as each standard sample is run or it can be performed by sequence reprocessing using standard data files that were previously acquired and stored to a disk For information on how to create a sequence either for running calibration samples or for reprocessing stored data files see Chapter 4 Sequence Operations You can also run calibration standards one at a time using the Single Run procedure described above To calibrate a single level method using a single calibration standard that has been saved to a disk follow the procedure outlined in Single Level Calibration Using a Stored Data File Single Level Calibration Using a Stored Data File 136 ChromQuest User Guide If you already have your calibration standard saved on your disk you can calibrate your method using the areas from this file Choose Analysis gt Analysis Single Level Calibration from the main menu to access the Analysis Single Level
107. Report Items Once you have inserted an item onto your custom report you can use the Cut Copy and Paste functions to move the item to another location on your report or to another Windows application that supports the clipboard functions These commands are located in the Edit menu on the menu bar Adding Fields to a Report Thermo Scientific 1 Right click the report area The following shortcut menu appears with options to create specific information areas on your report Figure 202 Report options menu Insert Field Insert Graph gt Insert Report gt Insert Object Update Fields Edit gt Drawing gt Zoom gt Margin Setup Print Preview Print Header Footer v Toolbar v Ruler ChromQuest User Guide 233 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 2 Choose Insert Field The following menu of Field items appears Figure 203 Report Insert Field options menu Insert Field User Name When you choose any of the Field items it is placed on your report at the current location of your cursor An item can be placed individually or several can be grouped together to create a custom area of chromatography information for your report These items are updated to reflect current data information whenever a report is printed or viewed You can also update them by right clicking and choosing Update Fields from the shortcut menu or by pressing the F9 key to update the current field
108. Reports check box in the Process Sequence dialog box See Figure 181 See Sequence Reports on page 260 for details on customizing sequence report templates Sequence reports are still generated for viewing even if the Print sequence reports check box is clear however they will not be printed To view the sequence reports choose Reports gt View gt Sequence Custom Reports You can manually print the reports by choosing Reports gt Print gt Sequence Custom Reports Saving a Sequence File Thermo Scientific Once you have created or edited a sequence you must save it on disk before you can use it to acquire or process data To save the file using the current sequence file name click the Save button on the command toolbar If you want to save the sequence using a new file name choose File gt Sequence gt Save As A dialog box appears where you can either choose an existing sequence file name or enter a new file name to save the sequence ChromOQuest User Guide 223 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Summary Reports Figure 198 Save sequence file as dialog box Save sequence file as asem SA la multilevel calibratio 8KB SEQ File 3 25 97 10 27 AM Sequence files seq v A list of current sequence files is displayed To view details of the files click the Details button at the top of the box To view the description of the currently highlighted sequence file click the Description button To
109. ST PHARMACEUTICALS 230 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports General text information typed onto the page of the report appears on the report in the location where it was typed If you want information to appear as a header or footer appearing on all pages of the report you should enter the text information as a header or footer as described in Headers and Footers on page 233 Setting Default Font Fonts can be changed in one of two ways If you want to set a default font that will be used unless you specifically change the formatting for a selected range of text right click and choose Edit gt Text gt Font to set the default font for the text you enter in your report The font selection is also available in the toolbar You can use the drop down font selection to change the current font or to quickly change a section of highlighted text without changing the default font Use the color button along with the Bold Italic Underline and strike through buttons to quickly format these aspects of the text Setting Justification To set default justification for text right click and choose Edit gt Text gt Left Justify Center Justify or Right Justify to set default justification for text on the report These commands are also available from the toolbar Adding Bullets You can automatically add bullets to text by clicking the Bullets button from the toolbar or by right cli
110. Scientific 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet Clear Calibration at Level Clears response factors and coefficients for current level only Average Replicates Forces averaging of replicates Clear Replicates Clears calibration replicates at this level before calibration Begin Loop Flags the run as the start of an infinite loop Runs that are between and include these flags are continuously run until stopped End Loop Flags the end of an infinite sequence loop Shutdown Flags this sample as a shutdown sample Print Additional Reports Specify one or more report templates and frequency of printing Note Not applicable for the following report templates Summary brp QC Check Standard brp Summary tpl Spike brp SysSuit brp Calibration report crp Calibration brp duplicate brp For details see release notes Begin System Suitability First run of a System Suitability sample set System Suitability Standard System Suitability Standard sample between Begin and End System suitability End System Suitability Last run of a System Suitability sample set Begin Summary First run to be included in a sequence summary Summary Run Run to be included in a sequence summary End Summary Last run to be included in a sequence summary ChromQuest User Guide 203 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet 204 ChromQuest User Guide Vial Summary Create a vial summary report for this row A summary of all re
111. To create a multi level calibration 1 Using your data acquisition method run one calibration standard saving it on disk Make sure your chromatography conditions and integration are correct 2 Use your stored standard data file to graphically create your calibration peak table using the Define Single Peak or Define Peaks command All the calibration parameters for each calibrated compound are entered in the Calibration Peak table The peak information is filled out graphically and then specific information for each peak is entered manually If you are doing multiple channel calibration be sure to set your calibration parameters for each channel 3 Complete your peak table by typing the peak names and concentration amounts reference peak internal standard numbers and other necessary parameters for your samples 4 Save your method 5 Calibrate your method The method can be calibrated using previously acquired standard data files or automatically as you run your standards A calibration can be performed in the following ways e Single Level Calibration Update calibration using areas from a stored standard file Calibrate by running the standard sample Calibrate as part of a sequence of runs e Multiple Level Calibration Update using stored standard files one level at a time or sequence reprocess Update bracketed calibration using stored standard files sequence reprocess using bracketed calibration
112. Up to five check standards can be defined ChromQuest User Guide 133 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 134 Peak Table Properties ChromQuest User Guide Check Std 1 5 RD If you are generating a Check Standard Report enter the value to be used for the percent relative difference limit here When the run is made the calculated concentration of the peak is compared with the check standard concentration specified in the peak table Check Std Conc If the difference is less than the Check Std RD the component passes If the difference is more than the Check Std RD the component fails and the failure action for that line of the sequence is taken Up to five check standards can be defined Spike 1 Amt For Spike Recovery Report enter the amounts of the first components used to spike the first spiked sample Spike 2 Amt For Spike Recovery Report enter the amounts of the second components used to spike the second spiked sample if you are spiking the sample twice Low Spike Limit Enter the lower limit as a percentage for spike recovery The calculated spike recovery is compared to this value If it falls below the low spike limit it fails High Spike Limit Enter the high limit as a percentage for spike recovery The calculated spike recovery is compared to this value If it falls above the high spike limit it fails Dup RD Limit Enter the value to be used for percent relative difference for
113. able for reporting e Calculate performance parameters for this channel Select one or more calculation methods The choices include USP EMG Exponential Modified Gaussian DAB German Pharmacopeia AOH Area Height JP Japanese Pharmacopeia BP British Pharmacopeia EP European Pharmacopeia and ASTM calculation methods Once you have selected options on the Column Performance tab the system calculates performance parameters after each analysis These parameters can be exported annotated on the chromatogram and printed in a custom report Relative Retention Times Relative retention times are calculated for a named peaks with reference peaks and b detected unnamed peaks that are members of uncalibrated or calibrated range groups if a reference peak is specified The reference peak specified in the group is used to calculate the RRT for the unnamed peaks using the same equation used for named peaks _ t2 ta ti ta where a Relative retention t2 the retention time measured from point of injection ta the retention time of an inert component not retained by the column taken from Unretained Peak Time in the Performance Options section of the method t the retention time from point of injection for reference peak defined in the peak table If no reference peak is found this value becomes zero 168 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options Files Use the Fil
114. al two or more standard samples with different concentration amounts creates a multiple level calibration curve also called multi level The calibration curve for a given component then becomes a line between the points that represent the area amount relationships of the compound at each concentration In some cases the calibration curve is forced through zero which causes the line to use the origin as one of the points This Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup eliminates the possibility of negative concentrations being calculated for low area peaks Several types of calculations are available for calculation of the actual curve called fit types The best fit type would be the one where the calibration points most closely fit on the line For details on calibrations and the equations used to calculate results refer to Chapter 2 in the ChromQuest 5 0 Reference Guide Replicates and Averaging Calibrations Initially a method contains no calibration When you run the first calibration standard the areas heights for each calibrated peak are entered into the method calibration If you run a subsequent standard at the same calibration level a replicate you have a choice of how you want the data system to treat the new areas heights for the calibration Setting the Calib Flag in the peak table to either Replace or Wt Average for each calibrated peak makes this choice If you choose to Replace the existing
115. anado 294 Preview Custom Reports iey dung ste ded Medea aA hie Pde oes 299 Indek eee eer Te et te er ee te eT ee 301 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide vii Preface About This Guide Welcome to ChromQuest 5 0 The ChromQuest chromatography data system is a member of the Thermo Fisher Scientific family of LC data systems Whether you are a new ChromQuest 5 0 user or are upgrading from a previous version of ChromQuest you will find the features of ChromQuest 5 0 both powerful and well organized To make your use of ChromQuest 5 0 as easy as possible this manual is designed to be a How To guide for the tasks you would normally perform using your data system Technical details such as how integration is performed and equations used are located in the ChromQuest Reference Guide In addition to this manual ChromQuest 5 0 comes with a comprehensive Help system that is at your fingertips If you are using ChromQuest 5 0 for the first time you might want to go through the tutorial in Chapter 2 Tutorial If you are using ChromQuest 5 0 to control a Surveyor Plus instrument you might want to go through the tutorials in the Surveyor Plus Getting Started with ChromQuest Tutorial manual New Features in ChromQuest 5 0 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest 5 0 provides these new features A navigation bar has been added to the Instrument window e The Move Baseline Start and Stop integration timed events have been replaced
116. and it can once again be analyzed When the electronic signature is revoked an entry is made in the audit trail to that effect ChromQuest User Guide 91 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Figure 95 Revoke Electronic Signatures dialog box Revoke Electronic Signatures New integration parameters are required Electronic signatures are available for printing on custom reports See Chapter 5 Custom Reports Viewing the Audit Trail Audit trail information is stored in the method or data file You can view the current audit trail information as follows e View the Method Audit Trail e View the Data File Audit Trail External Events e Instrument Status Event Direct Control 92 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific View the Method Audit Trail Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method To view the audit trail log for the current method choose File gt Method gt Audit Trail from the menu bar A listing of the audit trail appears that includes the User responsible for the change Time Logged method location Source of the change what was changed Activity and Reason for the change Figure 96 Method Audit Trail window i Method Audit Trail OF x System System System System System System System System System System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM 4 3 97 10 1
117. and saved in the ChromQuest program directory that is loaded whenever an instrument specific default method cannot be found If you want to create such a default method name it Default met and save it in the ChromQuest program directory Creating Multi Detector Methods With ChromQuest you can create a single method that acquires and processes data independently from multiple detectors simultaneously You need to complete the following sections of the method for each detector in your instrument configuration e Instrument Setup parameters e Peak table select the appropriate detector from the Analysis Channel list e Advanced gt Column Performance page select the appropriate detector from the Analysis Channel list Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 171 3 Method Development Creating Multi Wavelength Methods For each channel in a method you can set independent data acquisition integration reporting calibration and advanced options To create a multi channel method you must have the instrument configured for multiple detectors channels If your instrument is configured for more than one detector you can select the current channel by using the drop down list on the menu bar Once you select an Analysis Channel the method parameters you select apply to that channel and are saved separately in both the method file and in all data files acquired using this method Creating Multi Wavelength Methods You can collect
118. andard Report Templates Standard templates for all reports are provided with ChromQuest however you might want to create your own or edit the templates provided Standard report templates Area External Standard Internal Standard and Normalization are located in the C ChromQuest program directory and have the SRP extension You can create new standard report templates by saving your report template using the SRP extension Examples of the standard reports can be found in the Standard Reports section Sequence reports are created and saved using the Advanced Reports editor Unlike method custom reports sequence custom report templates are not saved as part of the sequence file and therefore must be saved as a template file if you want to use a sequence report template to generate a report Standard sequence report templates provided with ChromQuest Calibration Summary Duplicate QCCheckStd Spike and SysSuit are located in the C ChromQuest Sequence directory and have the BRP or TPL extension Method Custom Reports Thermo Scientific A custom report is normally created and saved as part of developing a method Once you have created a custom report within a method it is saved as part of the method To create a template for the custom report you must specifically save it as a template To access the Custom Report editor click the Custom Report button in the toolbar or choose Method gt Custom Report A custom report window
119. any Terms and Conditions of Sale which Terms and Conditions of Sale shall govern all conflicting information between the two documents Software Version ChromQuest 5 0 For Research Use Only Not regulated for medical or veterinary diagnostic use by U S Federal Drug Administration or other competent authorities Contents Thermo Scientific Chapter 1 it i ee ec eon ix Abo t This Gude opie Scie e ee eee lenin a whe eee AN ix New Features in ChromQuest 5 0 2 0 cece eee een eee eee ix Related Documentation 1 10 44 bee heehee anon eee Kien ee Kwee nee ewnes x Safety and Special Notices 2 carte iterated meee eae x Contacting S sesse srecsse bestasti aa gadis gore E E wa eens 5 xi Basics of Operation 2 2 2 2 2 000ccence cence eeeceeseeesnenscenene nanan 1 M in Menu Window soes te bei eee eee eer einen needs car eeereeeaes 2 Instrument Wi atd lt i pucioasa neben teas Cie ewe ea hs eee eyed tod 3 Online Instrument Wizard j 0i snip ele cae eed eke ee sk eee eee ed 3 Offline Instrument Wizard isc0scdd cad ckchonee ddebeee deans ddaas 4 Program Architecture and Data SUCHIN Sora ce pide eee wee nae edhe 4 Method Vile Structure sto sckasdy idee thee tee Ghed Chet ded OR he et 4 Data File Storage in Networked Operation 0 0000 cece eee 5 Data File Structure wins desi oreiro ued Ree bees eee AEE Re EY A 5 GLP Good Laboratory Practices 5 cis n anaa tear cere ets coos ces eeee A 6 Audit TAL seas cto aa ese ate oh those a
120. aoaea cigs nn reo em sac Batata sacle sd 7 Opening Data Files uu suunnan nane 8 Savin Fil Loci din hee Maes a a A a a a a 11 Saving Data Files prose hd crase ia n a eee Eee ky 11 Selecting a New Projects iikbccideite cae entieswhiivaenneiee ei seas 13 Features of the Instrument Window soon sce ouxne se nee Hae eee eas 14 View Preferences fale teh rannin a he Wee ea Soke awa A 15 The Chromatogram Window nc oidoeend tims vedas adieieben iw 17 Adding a Trace Viewing Multiple Chromatograms 000 19 Clearing Overlaid Traces nuunuu nunne 21 Adding Multiple Traces et sins i ceeeine ee eee eee de ede Ree ee 21 Chromatogram ANNOtalonis cess cbs cers coaeeus cei Kew cbare eee code 23 Chromatogram Appearance iuw vor ieun voles er dbesenes eae raes 24 Axis Seip Mas cata ana aa Mitatuease ated EDEA E ET 27 Data Graph Propertiets 250 425 cwisewnncwes Rew geese ane gel Ree a 29 Chromatogram Operations ow ete nic neee ade hore sed eheekese bon edes 34 Mathematical Operations cs icy os 05 Ripe 8 She KON ERE KES ROW ses 39 OLS ict eea a iea ia Sere a a eee eae eee ere E a E 43 Graphical Programming sc iecraneeae eee ede eee eee eee eee eed 44 Data Acquisition and Contiel ickioicaigel coe take Mase tags 44 ChromQuest User Guide Contents Chapter 2 T t rials seende esate a eran ed cece te areca oop AA a a re A emcee eee 47 Using the Instrument Wizards canst 4 a0 sea echoes cyhiravied eee 48 Creating an Acquisition
121. ard Run Direction Select which direction you want the runs to be displayed on the table Figure 269 Table Wizard Run Direction page Table Wizard Run Direction i i R OUP Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 293 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Table Wizard Statistics Select Yes if you want to include a statistics section in your table Calculated statistics include Min Max Mean Std Deviation and RSD Figure 270 Table Wizard Statistics page Table Wizard Statistics When you are done with this page click Finish A sequence summary table is inserted in your Advanced Report at the current cell location Adding a Chart You can add a chart to graph data in your advanced report First you must define an area on your report for the chart to appear To do this hold down the mouse button on the spreadsheet and drag it over an area where you want the chart to appear Next right click the cover cell area you just defined and choose Insert gt Chart A dialog box opens where you can define your chart 294 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Figure 271 Chart Properties dialog box Chart Title eak Areas Eont Chart Style Jarea Chart I Show example chart iar Con Group Tits EEE Vertical Multiple C12 an r Cancel Help Chart Title Enter a title that will appear at the top of your chart Chart S
122. at the baseline is displayed 3 Choose Reports gt View gt External Standard from the menu bar The external standard appears on your screen 70 ChromOQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files Figure 73 External Standard window E External Standard bal _ 0 x External Standard Report Page l of 1 Method Name C ChromQuest Projects Default Method Test met CAChrom Quest Projects D efault Data Test005 dat B A Cook 03 27 2003 4 18 24 PM 03 27 2003 04 26 32 PM Retention Time Minutes If you want you can modify the standard report templates or create entirely new reports using the Custom Report capability of ChromQuest You can create custom method reports and or custom Sequence reports These are described in detail in Chapter 5 Custom Reports To view the custom report template in the multilevel calibration met file 1 Open the file if it is not already open 2 Click the Edit Custom Report button on the command toolbar to open the method Custom Report editor The current method custom report template appears Examine the custom report template by scrolling through it using the scroll bars that appear on the bottom and side of the window Before you attempt to edit or create your own custom report thoroughly review Chapter 5 Custom Reports To return to the method click the x box in the upper right corner of the custom report window Thermo Scientific ChromQuest Use
123. ation of resolution if desired If this is left blank the resolution is calculated for the peak of interest based on the detected peak preceding it If the peak entered here is not detected or if a peak refers to itself for the Resolution ID the resolution is not calculated e Ref ID Enter a retention time reference peak ID to be used for this peak This is the peak ID number from the peak table If you don t know it you can add it to the peak table later Reference peaks are used to calculate Relative Retention Times e Retention Time Window The Retention Time Window value sets a window around the expected retention time of calibrated peaks A retention time window is important because it allows a peak to drift slightly within the window and still be identified as a calibrated peak If no retention time window is set a calibrated peak must ALWAYS occur at exactly the expected retention time in order to be identified as the calibrated component You can select a Relative Retention Time Window or an Absolute Retention Time Window Relative The relative retention time window is based on a percent of the expected retention time of the component By default the Relative Retention Time Window is set to 5 which means that the Retention Time Window for calibrated peaks is set to 5 of their expected retention time Later eluting peaks have larger time windows if a Relative Retention Time Window is used Use a relative retention
124. atogram was analyzed If the Save all analysis results option is turned on Tools gt Options gt General tab accessed from the Main menu a list of all analysis results is available for you to open with the file ChromQuest User Guide 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 10 Open with Pretreatment When you select this box the pretreatment file if applicable used at the time the data was acquired is opened when the data file is opened e Searching for Data Files If you are interested in specific data files there are options that allow display of only the files of interest Using the area titled Find files that match these criteria you can search for files that contain specific information You can specify all or part of a Sample ID You can search for files acquired by a designated Analyst You can find files that were acquired during a specific time frame such as Yesterday Last 7 Days and Today You can also search for files that were modified during a specific time frame These criteria can be used one at a time or combined You can also include wildcards as part of the file name to search To do the search fill in the field of interest for files you want to search and then click Find Now For example if you enter Tester in the Sample ID field and click Find Now all the files where the Sample ID is Tester followed by anything are displayed Click New Search if you want to clear the
125. automatically in the custom report if the chart changes This creates a very efficient way of combining data for reports Saving the Custom Report Template To save your report template for use with other methods choose File gt Report Template gt Save As and give the report template a name By default ChromQuest gives report template files the rep extension To open a report template from the Custom Report editor choose File gt Report Template gt Open and select the template desired from the list Once a custom report has been created click the X at the top right corner to close the Custom Report editor and return to the ChromQuest application in which you are working To view or print the report choose Reports gt View or Reports gt Print and then choose the Custom Report option Viewing and Printing the Custom Report Thermo Scientific Once the custom report has been created it isupdated whenever the files it reports are integrated You can view the current custom report without printing it in one of two ways One way is to right click the Custom Report editor screen and choose Preview from the shortcut menu Or choose Reports gt View Custom Report from the menu bar ChromQuest User Guide 265 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports Note In order to view a report that includes current data the data must be analyzed before the report will contain information Using Print Preview to View Custom Reports You can pr
126. ave button is also provided BIS ChromQuest User Guide 79 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Instrument Setup The instrument setup portion of your method tells how you want to acquire the data coming from your chromatograph This information is entered in the Instrument Setup dialog box Click Instrument Setup or choose Method gt Instrument Setup A dialog box appears that displays the data acquisition parameters required for the type of data acquisition configured for this instrument Figure 83 Instrument Setup dialog box Detector 1 page E Instrument Setup Iof x T ExtemalEvents il Detector 1 X Trigger gt M Acquisition Channel On yi Period Suitable for minimum peak width at base of 0 033 Min Run Time 20 00 Min Acquisition Delay fo Min Detector 1 x For each detector channel x configured on the instrument define the following acquisition information Acquisition Channel On Select this check box to turn the acquisition for this channel on If this box is clear no data is acquired for this channel e Sampling Data will be sampled by the system at this rate You can choose how you want to specify the sampling rate When you select a sampling rate a prompt appears indicating the narrowest peak width for which this sampling rate is considered adequate Note Thermo Fisher Scientific recommends that you use Graphical Events Programming to determine the opti
127. be included in the sequence Figure 175 Open Data File dialog box Look in Data e aael a LabTest2007 dat a multi calibration level 6 dat a multi calibration level 1 dat a QC001 dat multi calibration level 2 dat Qco02 dat multi calibration level 3 dat a 5TD001 dat multi calibration level 4 dat a STDOO2 dat a multi calibration level 5 dat a SysSuitO01 dat File name muti calibration level 5 dat Files of type Chrom Files dat cdf asc b arc pts Y Open Cancel rl CEEDEE Help A Find files that match these criteria Sample ID Created fany time x Find Now Analyst 7 Modified any time 7 New Search a Mo multi calibration level 1 dat 53 2 multi calibration level 2 dat one multi calibration level 3 dat multi calibration level 4 dat multi calibration level 5 dat F Search results 4 To select a data file select its file name and click Add or double click the data file name Each file that you add appears in the Data Files list displayed at the bottom of the dialog box You can delete a file from the list by selecting it and then clicking Delete When you have completed the list of files click Open to return to the Sequence Wizard To enter a range of data files select the last data file in your list press SHIFT and then select the first data file in your list The selected files are displayed in th
128. ches for and executez the next run with a shutdown run type If no shutdown run type is found it searches from the beginning of the sequence The following Actions require you to select Action Parameters Re inject Specify the number of times you wish to attempt re injection of the sample if the injection fails 208 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Setting the Sequence Properties Run Program Specify a program name to be run You can also select a program name from the disk by clicking the button in the field Goto Specify a line in the sequence to Go To and enter a Repeat count for the number of retries before going to the new line Restart System Suitability Specify the number of times you wish to attempt restarting system suitability e Description Enter a description for this sample This is text information that is stored in the raw data file Setting the Sequence Properties When you create a new sequence you can enter a description and designate the default directories for data and methods To set these properties choose Sequence gt Properties A dialog box appears Figure 186 Sequence Properties Options dialog box Sequence Properties Ea Options r Description l j ary Path D enterprises Projects E3 r File paths Method o enterprise Projects D efault Methods o gt Data p enterprise Projects Defaults
129. ck and choose Operations gt Add from the shortcut menu and then follow the instructions in the upper right corner of the chromatogram window Figure 39 Chromatograms before addition ii Channel A Time 6 74399 Minutes Amplitude 1e 005 Click on 1st trace Channel A Channel A Figure 40 Result trace is displayed in window E Channel A OF x Time 7 36319 Minutes Amplitude 1 9e 005 0 04 Channel 4 Channel A Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 39 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Smoothing To perform a 9 point Savitsky Golay smoothing operation on a selected data file right click and choose Operations gt Smooth from the shortcut menu A prompt appears in the window instructing you to Click on trace Click the chromatogram to be smoothed The result trace appears in the window Figure 41 Chromatogram before smoothing E Channel A Time 4 60831 Minutes Amplitude 0 000432 0 00040 0 00045 Figure 42 Smoothed result trace is displayed with original trace E Channel A of x Time 4 32864 Minutes Amplitude 0 000443 40 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Calculating Derivatives Thermo Scientific To calculate and display the first or second derivative of a chromatogram right click and choose 1st Derivative or 2nd Derivative from the shortcut menu A p
130. cking and choosing Edit gt Text gt Bullets When you activate this button each new text paragraph is added with a bullet Adding Borders and Shading If you want to highlight an item on the report with a border or by shading it select the item and click the Borders and Shading button or right click and choose Edit gt Text gt Borders and Shading A dialog box opens where you can designate where the border or shading will appear and the percent of shading to apply Figure 201 Borders and Shading dialog box Borders and Shading x Paragraph Borders MV Top Cancel V Bottom EEN V Left Help IV Right Shading 50 Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 231 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 232 Setting Default Margins Zoom Levels Drawing Lines and Boxes ChromQuest User Guide To set margins for the report right click and choose Margin Setup from the shortcut menu A dialog box appears for you to enter the units inches or centimeters and margins for the page right left top and bottom Select the level of magnification for viewing your report by clicking the Zoom button from the toolbar and then selecting the percent zoom level You can zoom in to get a close up view of your document increase zoom or zoom out to see more of the page at a reduced size decrease zoom You can add emphasis to your report by drawing lines and boxes for important areas Drawing
131. click the spreadsheet and choose Header Footer A dialog box opens where you define the contents of your header and footer Figure 255 Header Footer dialog box Header Footer Ea r Header Footer Left Aligned Right Aligned Font 7 Header m Distance to Frame Header 0 40 in Footer fo 40 in cros Click one of the fields under the Left Aligned Centered or Right Aligned columns You can type text that will appear with the indicated alignment or you can insert field codes for automatic insertion of items such as date time and page numbers When you have a cell selected you can change the font by clicking Font and selecting the desired font and characteristics Note Font colors are not supported in the header and footer sections Field codes that can be inserted in a header or footer F Report Template Name P Page number N Number of pages SEQNUM Sequence page number D Date you can specify the date formatting with an additional parameter for example D h m Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting e Date Format Codes a A b B c d H I j m M Yop S U Yow W x X Yoy Y z YZ Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name Full month name Date and time representation appropriate for locale Day of month as decimal number 01 31 Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 Hour in 12 hour
132. closed When the file is subsequently opened its checksum is verified first If the check fails the calculated checksum for the file does not match the one previously calculated for the file the file cannot be opened and an error is posted in the instrument activity log Checksum verification is Enterprise wide In addition the Extended Security function provides additional security to the Enterprise in the following ways e All system administrators have full access to everything Thermo Scientific Audit Trail Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure e All non system administrators have read execute rights to project directories for which they have rights e All non system administrators have read write execute rights to project subfolders for which they have rights This means that users without system administrator rights cannot create subdirectories or files under the project directory and they cannot rename or delete files under the project subfolders Directories can still be created in project subfolders but only through ChromQuest Each Method file can have an Audit Trail enabled When this feature is enabled changes to the method are logged in the file and cannot be removed or overwritten Once the method audit trail is enabled for a method it cannot be turned off for that method To view the changes logged in the Audit Trail for a method choose File gt Method gt Audit Tra
133. cription and audit trail for the pretreatment program Opening a Pretreatment File To open an existing pretreatment file from the Instrument window menu bar choose File gt Pretreatment gt Open The following dialog box appears where you can select a pretreatment file to open for the current instrument Figure 158 Open Pretreatment File dialog box Look in e Pretreatment gt eE Dilutions ape Cancel Help tlk File name v Files of type Pretreat Files ape bt Find files that match these criteria Text in Desc Created Jany time x Find Now Analyst 7 Modified Jany time x New Search 174 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Offline Instruments Select the file to open or use the search boxes at the bottom to search for a file that matches criteria you select Saving a Pretreatment File To save a pretreatment program in a file that can be used later choose File gt Pretreatment gt Save As from the Instrument Window menu bar View Pretreatment Audit Trail Thermo Scientific If you have the pretreatment audit trail function enabled you can view the pretreatment audit trail by choosing File gt Pretreatment gt Audit Trail from the Instrument window menu bar The following audit trail window appears where you can view the audit trail history for your pretreatment file Figure 159 Pretreatment Audit Trail window E Pretreatment Audi
134. ct a stored data file from which you can select a trace for display e Trace Select the trace to be displayed Click the adjacent icon to display available traces e Scale to Select one of the scaling options Trace x Scales to another trace in the window Autoscale to largest peak Scales such that the largest peak is on scale Autoscale to 2nd largest peak Scales such that the 2nd largest peak is on scale Autoscale to 3rd largest peak Scales such that the 3rd largest peak is on scale User Defined Select this to enter a value for Y max and min Normalized Select this to normalize one trace to fit on the graph e Y min If you have selected a User Defined scale enter a minimum value for the Y axis Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure e Y max If you have selected a User Defined scale enter a maximum value for the Y axis e Units Select the units for display e X offset Enter a value in units for offset of the X axis e Y offset Enter a value in units for offset of the Y axis e Y scale If desired enter a multiplier to apply to the entire trace here Clearing Overlaid Traces You can clear all overlaid traces from the current chromatogram window by right clicking and then selecting Clear Overlays from the shortcut menu Adding Multiple Traces Thermo Scientific If you want to quickly add more than one chromatogram to your view right click and choose Add Mu
135. d Calibration O05amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_005amino_2 met d Calibration O06amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_O06amino_2 met d Unknown INININ N N N N N N O04amino_2 met amino_2 met Unknown O05amino_2 met amino_2 met Unknown OO6amino_2 met amino_2 met Calibration O07 amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_O07amino_2 met d Calibration O08amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_O08amino_2 met d Calibration O039amino_2 met amino_2 met Unknown O07 amino_2 met amino_2 met Unknown O08amino_2 met amino_2 met Unknown O09amino_2 met amino_2 met asi al a sl a Ee 8 ass 10 ie ad SBS E ia ibe E ae Lapa Calibration O SOl Olwi rn OO wim S S Olwin NIN IN INI N NNN N N 01 Qamino_ 2 met amino_2 met The new sequence is displayed as untitled To save your new sequence choose File gt Sequence gt Save As and type the name of the new sequence To close the sequence spreadsheet click the X box in the upper right corner of the spreadsheet To open the current sequence spreadsheet choose Sequence gt Edit Sequence or click the Edit Sequence button in the toolbar Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Reprocessing Sequence Creating a Reprocessing Sequence Thermo Scientific You can use the Sequence Wizard to create a sequence contai
136. d If the baseline check results indicate a failure of the test then the current run is cancelled and the baseline check data and results are stored in the data file without any other acquisition data If the run is cancelled by the user or because of a hardware error prior to the completion of the baseline check data acquisition then no data is saved Figure 85 Instrument Setup dialog box Baseline Check page E Instrument Setup OF x MM Detector 1 BMH Detector 2 VL Baseline Check X Trigger r General To pass the baseline must meet the test criteria for 15 0 minutes Stop checking baseline if conditions are not met after fi 5 0 minutes Noise test method ms C ASTM Enable Threshold Enable Threshold gaoa Noise Test Noise Drift Test Drift hr 82 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method To pass the baseline must meet the test criteria for This specifies the minimum time over which the baseline stability is calculated Stop checking baseline if conditions are not met after This specifies the maximum time that is spent checking the baseline If conditions are not satisfied in this time then the baseline check fails Noise test method This is used to specify the noise calculation method that should be applied to the acquired data Test Spreadsheet This spreadsheet specifies the channels to be used fo
137. d gt Method Wizard and click Create New Method This overwrites current method parameters with those of the current ChromQuest default method You can create a new method from the instrument or offline instrument application areas of ChromQuest However you only have access to starting actual data acquisition when you are in one of the instrument areas To start the Method Wizard from the Instrument Wizard box click the button labeled Create or modify a method Figure 81 Instrument Wizard window Instrument Wizard New Instrument x Create or modify a method Create a sequence Run one sample ry Run a sequence of samples J Show at instrument startup When you click this button the Method Wizard appears where you select how you want to use the wizard Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Figure 82 Method Wizard window Method Wizard New Instrument e Click Create a new method to start a new method with the system default method parameters e Click Modify the current method to step through the current method and make changes e Click Modify a method on disk to open a file saved on disk and step through it to make changes When you select one of these buttons the Method Wizard sets up a bank of buttons in your application window These buttons and their associated dialog boxes step you through method generation A s
138. d subsequent changes to the method are logged in the method Note Once the Enable Audit Trail box is selected it cannot be cleared The method continues to have its audit trail enabled unless you save the file under a new file name If you select the Enable Audit Trail check box the following warning appears Figure 89 Enable Audit Trail warning dialog box Instrument 1 Q Enabling Audit Trail is permanent Do you wish to continue If you select No you are returned to the Audit Trail tab and you can continue If you select Yes the Enable Audit Trail is permanently selected for this method 86 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Once the Enable Audit Trail check box is selected the following options are available for documenting changes Figure 90 Method Properties dialog box Audit Trail page Method Properties JV Enable audit trail Prompt for reason at every change This option requires the user to enter a reason for every subsequent change to the method at the time the change is made e Prompt for reason when saving Method This option requires the user to enter a reason for each change when the Method is saved Do not prompt for reason When this option is selected changes are documented but the user is not required to enter a reason for the changes ChromQuest User Guide 87 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisitio
139. d Range options see the examples in Group Calibration Calibrated Range on page 150 e Calibrated Range Examples The following example reports were generated using the peak options for calibrated range groups using the simple chromatogram shown in the next figure In this example there are four named calibrated peaks Peak 1 Peak 4 and one calibrated range group defined Group 1 where Peak 2 falls within the time range defined for the group In this situation there are various options on how to treat the named peak as part of the group Figure 142 Calibration Range window Hinixi Time 9 99144 Minutes Amplitude 0 402 mAU Channel A Multi Calibration Level 5 Name Minutes The various reports are generated based on the options selected in the Group Range Definition dialog box This appears when you define the group graphically or when you click the group def field in the Group table Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 157 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration 158 ChromQuest User Guide IV Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks in group Figure 143 Group Range Definition dialog box Group Range Definition X Defined ranges for this group Cancel Help Example 1 In this example the concentration of Peak 2 is calculated using its own response factor and its area is used in the calculation of the group response factor Include named peaks option is sel
140. displayed if desired Trace Setup This tab gives you access to adding removing traces and setting scaling options for the traces Each row in the spreadsheet represents one of the traces currently in the chromatogram window The details of the highlighted trace appear in the trace properties boxes in the bottom of the dialog box where you can view or change them Figure 26 Data Graph Properties dialog box Trace Setup page Data Graph Properties x G Axis Setup Appearance Lt Show Lond DataSource H Current Datal gt Channel A w r Trace 1 Data source Cueta Trace hnne ee Scale to Nomaized OO Y min a Y max a Units vots x offset ooo x scale fi Y offset pooo Y scale in Annotations Hide Details Beset Scaling Cancel Apply Help e Show Select this box to show the trace in the chromatogram window Clear this box to remove the trace from the display but leave it open This is a convenient way to temporarily remove a trace from the viewing window Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 29 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 30 ChromQuest User Guide e Legend Select this box to show the legend for the trace The legend appears in the upper right corner of the window and displays the name of the trace Clear this box to remove the legend for this trace from the chromatogram window Setup for the appearance of t
141. dit Drawing Zoom Margin Setup Print Preview Print Header Footer v Toolbar v Ruler 2 Choose the Data Graph option to insert a chromatogram on your report where your current cursor is located The following tab box appears 236 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Figure 206 Data Graph Properties dialog box Data Graph Properties x Trace Setup Axis Setup Appearance Lt Show Lgnd DataSource Current Data Open Data Data source Trace Po Scale to FO Y min ts Y max ft Units ss x offset scale ft Y offset Y scale ns Annotations Hide Details Beset Scaling cd Cancel Apply Help 3 The spreadsheet allows you to add chromatograms or other traces to the current graph Each row represents a trace that will appear in this graph For each row you must designate how you want the data to be displayed Data Source Click the button adjacent to the box and select a source from the available data sources listed Current Data This selection allows you to select a trace from the current chromatography data Open Data This allows you to select a stored data file from which you can select a trace for display Trace Select the type of trace you want to display from the available traces specified in the data source Use the Show and Lgnd check boxes to turn O
142. dotted line that extends completely across the page To remove a page break move the cursor to just below the page break line and press the BACKSPACE key until the page break is removed e Tab Stops Tab stops are used to align items on a page By default tab stops are set every 2 inch However you can move the tab stops so that there is room between items to accommodate changes such as field items that change in length To set a new tab stop use your mouse to insert the tab onto the ruler bar at the top of the page as described in the next section Once you have inserted a new tab stop you can move it by clicking and dragging it to a new location on the horizontal ruler To remove a tab stop click it and drag it completely to the left of the horizontal ruler Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Left Tab Stop Click the left mouse button on the ruler at the location for the new tab A left tab stop left justifies tabbed text to that location Right Tab Stop Click the right mouse button on the ruler at the location for the new tab A right tab stop right justifies tabbed text to that location Center Tab Stop Hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button on the ruler at the location for the new tab A center tab stop center justifies tabbed text to that location ao Numeric Tab Stop Hold down the SHIFT key and click the right mouse button on the ruler at the location
143. dow and control functions that relate to data acquisition are not available appear grayed out Figure 157 Offline Instrument window fa Instrument 1 Offline Method untitled met Data multi calibration level 4 dat File Edit View Method Data Sequence Analysis Control Reports Window Help SS El Detector A HASE BB sm ele BS aem 2 E Channel A Time 5 66536 Minutes Amplitude 0 029062 a mn ChromQuest User Guide 173 3 Method Development Offline Instruments Once you have created and saved a method in an offline instrument it can be used to acquire data by opening the method file from the Instrument window and proceeding as usual Monitoring an Instrument Offline While you are in the offline instrument window you can monitor the real time data on the instrument by choosing Control gt Monitor Offline Once you have selected this command you will be able to view the real time data in your offline instrument window as it is being acquired You do not have access to start or stop the data acquisition Pretreatment Files An autosampler pretreatment injector program is comprised of a series of numbered lines each of which defines an operation that the injector carries out sequentially If your autosampler supports a pretreatment program the Pretreatment command appears on the menu bar From this menu you can create edit an autosampler pretreatment program and set up properties such as a des
144. e r Run range Mode Help All Tower N A 7 Selection Processing mode Reintegrate 7 C Range Bracketing None 7 Printing T Review J Print method reports Results revien i pan se after each run Calibration r JV Print sequence reports pause after ei h calibration set Sequence Print Adding a Sequence List to a Custom Report To include details of a sequence in your sequence custom report use the right click shortcut menu and choose Insert Report gt Sequence Print This command adds a Sequence area to your template that contains current sequence information when you Print or View the report This command is only available from the Sequence Custom Report editor Inserting a Sequence Calibration Report Thermo Scientific To add a sequence calibration report to your sequence custom report template right click and choose Insert Report gt Sequence Calibration from the shortcut menu A table template is inserted into your sequence report for the sequence calibration report Note that this table contains placeholder information only and not data from your system Figure 237 Sequence calibration report T i i t E S E AET id RT Min New RT ORF Average LRE RSD Min i Peak 1 44 350 i 43 758 I 1234567 7112345678 25 00 Passed i 89 ig i mee Ee vesuebtoved EA RE r3 eer EE aene ALED manne i 39 9 j C
145. e R squared goodness of fit value for each e Temporarily remove points from the calibration curve e View response factors replicate areas and standard deviation values e Use the concentration calculator to calculate amounts from manually entered areas Viewing the Calibration Curve Calibrated peaks are listed in the peak list To view the calibration information for a given calibrated peak click the peak name from the peak list to highlight it The spreadsheet and calibration curve are updated to include the current calibration information for that peak The calibration curve for the peak selected appears in the lower left corner of the window When you move the cursor over one of the calibration point replicates on the curve a tool tip appears that gives you information about that calibration point The box at the lower right of the window displays parameters and calculation data for the calibration curve displayed This includes Average Response Factor the Response Factor Standard Deviation the Response Factor RSD Scaling factor LSQ Weighting factor Force through zero On or Off Replicate mode and calculations for each fit type displayed along with r for the fit Figure 129 Review Calibration window GC1 Method LCV met Data Low Conc Volatiles 018 Review Peak Calibration Detector 1 Ser el 0 0670692 0 00148804 0 116176 0 116176 0 00332358 0 172302 0 172302 0 0019511
146. e Run Acquisition dialog box CTT x 0s kerennctent a Sample ID 0 5 toluene in methanol gt Calibration level 1 submit Method Projects Tutorial Method PrepOnly met S I Clear all calibration Submit Priority Data path Projects Tutorial Data Clear calibration for level Cancel Data file Test dat gt J Print calibration report Help Number of reps fi J Print method report m Amount values gt _ gt r Run information F Clear replicates Sample amount Internal standard amount 1 1 1 1 Begin un es ime Q i cts T utorial Pretreatment T en Fold Dilution ape J Baseline Check Multiplication factors Dilution factors m Autosampler Vial A1 Injection volume Tower N A 2 Description Click Submit to add the sequence or single run to the bottom of the current queue If you click Submit Priority to add an item to the queue the item you are submitting is scheduled to run immediately after the current run is finished After the priority item is complete the previously running sequence resumes Bracketed Calibrations Thermo Scientific With the Bracketing option for starting a sequence acquisition you can process data using calibration replicates that are run in brackets around your samples in the sequence This enables you to process all your data files using consistent response factors When you choose a brac
147. e Sequence Wizard dialog box Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 193 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics Figure 176 Sequence Wizard Sequence Wizard Select Files Select Files page D enterprise Projects D efault D ataAmino03 dat D enterprise Projects D efault D ata Amino04 dat To add more files click the File Open button Otherwise click Finish and a reprocessing sequence spreadsheet appears with the selected files appearing as rows Sequence Spreadsheet Basics 194 ChromQuest User Guide All sequences are displayed in a spreadsheet similar to the one shown below Although the information in the fields varies the spreadsheets always support certain basic features Figure 177 Sequence spreadsheet window Sequence Test4 seq oR JCALSMB OMlamino_2 met amino_2 met i r SMR 001 amino_2 met amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_001 amino_2 met Rep1 dat ie Cal_001amino_2 met Rep2 dat SMR O02amino_2 met e SMR O02amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_002amino_2 met Rep1 dat Cal_002amino_2 met Rep2 dat CALSMR m 003amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_003amino_2 met Rep 1 dat amino_2 met CAL SMR 1 003amino_2 met Summary Run 1 001 amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_003amino_2 met Rep2 dat 001 amino_2 met Rep1 dat Se ee ee Summary Run 1 002amino_2 met amino_2 met 002amino_2 met Rep1 dat n Q02amino_2met_ _ amino_2 met _ 002amino_2 met Fie
148. e report for the sequence System Suitability report Note that this table contains placeholder information only and not data from your system Figure 252 Sequence System Suitability report In order for your sequence report to contain valid check standard information when it is printed you must make sure your method and sequence are set up to create a sequence System Suitability report For details on how to do this refer to the ChromQuest Reference Guide Advanced Reporting The Advanced Reporting feature uses a spreadsheet format to make it easy to create complex customized reports A variety of standard report templates is provided for you that can be easily modified to suit your application In addition you can create completely customized report templates that extract virtually any data or file information and apply mathematical functions to it For example you can create reports that combine peak data from multiple channels into a single report Or you can take the results from a sequence of runs and calculate statistical analysis on them Each advanced report begins as an advanced report template Once the report template is created and saved it can be used to create and print reports from sequence runs or sequence reprocessing by designating the report template from the Run Type of the run in the sequence Unlike the Custom Method and Sequence reports Advanced Reports are not saved as part of the method or sequence N
149. e report uses Dynamic Data Functions This type of function enables the report to expand or contract by repeating the function for all data that meet the specified requirements Function Wizard Select Function 282 ChromQuest User Guide Begin by specifying whether or not this function is used in a sequence report If so additional screens will appear for required information Figure 257 Function Wizard Select Function page Function Wizard Select Function Data Source Sequence file Current data file What function would you like to insert DATA EMG Resolution GROUP EMG Theoretical Plates INSTRUMENT EMG Theoretical Plates Per M ESTD Concentration Expected Retention Time Height Height Integration Codes ISTD Concentration JP Resolution JP Theoretical Plates JP Theoretical Plates Per Met Name NORM Concentration Number zl PROJECT SEQUENCE B Cancel lt Back Frei Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Functions You can select a system custom function for your advanced report by choosing a category on the left then selecting a function from the category function list on the right When you have made your selection click Next The available categories and the types of functions they contain are as follows Data Data and parameters available in a data file Group Information from the group table Instrument Instrument parameters
150. e was not cancelled For example if you set four runs with a starting run number of 101 and then cancel during run 102 when you restart the next run number is 105 If the Sample ID is also incremented it will increment in parallel Print method report When this check box is selected the method report or reports prints at the end of the run Amount values In this section you can enter values that affect how the concentrations are calculated If you are making a single data acquisition prior to calibrating your method simply leave these values at the default level Sample amount The sample amount value is used as a divisor during calculation of concentrations It is intended to compensate for differences between samples due to weighing and when percentages of the total sample are being calculated rather than the amount detected in an injection Internal standard amount For calibration runs the internal standard amount is taken from the method peak table For unknown runs enter the amount of the internal standard in your unknown sample Multiplication factors Enter one to three multiplication factors to be used for this run All quantitated peaks are multiplied by these factors Dilution factors Enter one to three dilution factors to be used for this run All quantitated peaks are divided by these factors Thermo Scientific Sample Description Submit Thermo Scientific 3 Method Developmen
151. each numeric parameter you can enter the number of decimal places to be displayed Click on the parameter in the Report the following parameters box and then type the number of decimals to be shown for that parameter Default decimals appear for all numeric parameters e Column Header Use this box to type or edit the title that appears at the top of the column Click OK to insert the report table into your custom report at the current location of your cursor The report table appears on your custom report page with column headings and data placeholders shown To remove report tables quickly right click the table and choose Delete Table ChromQuest User Guide 255 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 256 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 225 Method Custom Report window 01x TimesNewRonan 2 e 7 ou plal 2 i Method Custom Report MAIN ST PHARMACEUTICALS C ChromQuest Projects Default Data multi calibration level l dat Channel A Results i System 3 27 2003 You can format the fonts and appearance of the report table by modifying the appearance of the table on the page e Change Column Width To change a column width move the cursor over the border of the column until double vertical lines appear Hold down the mouse button and drag the column border to the width you require e Change Fonts To change a font for text in the table select the text by highlighting it with the mouse or c
152. eakl 10 000 20 000 15 000 66 667 50 000 FAILED Peak2 5 000 6 000 5 500 13 182 60 000 Passed Peak3 15 000 20 000 17 500 23 571 50 000 Passed Peak4 10 000 20 000 15 000 66 667 50 000 FAILED The following equations are used in this QC Duplicate report Dup 1 Conc Dup 2 Conc Mean C ean Conc 5 x RD Dup 2 Conc Dup 2 Conc 100 Mean Conc Sequence Check Standard Report If you want your sequence report to include a Sequence Check Standard report right click and choose Insert Report gt Sequence Check Standard from the shortcut menu You are prompted whether you want to include Fully Qualified file names Select the check box if you want to include full paths in the file names A table template is inserted into your sequence report for the sequence check standard report Note that this table contains placeholder information only and not data from your system Figure 250 Sequence Check Standard report Sample ID i Acquired DACHROM Dat Multi 1 1 30 97 9 28 38 a Multical 001 i In order for your sequence report to contain valid check standard information when it is printed you must make sure your method and sequence are set up to create a sequence check standard report Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 273 5 Custom Reports Creating QC Reports In the Peak table of the method the concentration of the compound in the check sample is entered as the Check Std Conc value The relative diffe
153. ected The concentrations of unnamed peaks in the group range are calculated using the group response factor The group concentration is calculated by summing the concentrations of the peaks defined for the group The total group is not included in the individual peak report but is listed separately in the group report section Because the group total is not included as a separate line in the peak table the Area and Norm concentrations add up to 100 Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks option is selected Example 2 In this example the concentration of Peak 2 is calculated using its own response factor and its area is used in the calculation of the group response factor Include named peaks option is selected The concentrations of unnamed peaks in the group range are not calculated and reported individually The group concentration is calculated using the total area of all defined group peaks and the group response factor The total group concentration is included in the individual peak report Because the group total is included as a separate line in the peak table the Area and Norm concentrations do not add up to 100 Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks option is cleared Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Figure 144 Run Report report for example 2 Name Retention Area AreaPercent ESTD Conc NORM Conc Response Time Factor Peakl 5 719 462656 25 363 40 000 5 810 10405 54 Peak 2
154. ed displays of simple statistics or complex mathematical computations for the data A wizard makes using the advanced reporting features easy Contents e Anatomy of a Custom Report e Method Custom Reports e Sequence Reports e Creating QC Reports e Advanced Reporting ChromQuest User Guide 225 5 Custom Reports Anatomy of a Custom Report Anatomy of a Custom Report A ChromQuest custom report can contain a wide variety of information that can be displayed in any order Because using the Custom Report editor is similar to using a word processing program you can change fonts colors or margins and insert chromatograms graphics system information or even multimedia sound and video clips In addition to free form text you can select a wide variety of information and objects to be placed in your report You choose from items presented in four different categories Field items Graph items Report items and general Object items e Field items are individual fields of information related to the current data File name method name and injection volume are examples of chromatography field items e Graph items generally contain groups of graphically related information that belongs together Chromatograms are examples of graph items These items can be placed moved and edited independently of other items on the report e Reports are tables of information where the user defines the columns A report table can include for
155. ed into the Sequence spreadsheet for the runs involved in the report These different types of QC Reports are selected in the Run Type column of the sequence The values used to test the results of a sequence analysis are set in the Peak table of the method for each component in the analysis Sequence Spike Report Thermo Scientific If you want your sequence report to include a Sequence Spike report right click and choose Insert Report gt Sequence Spike from the shortcut menu Select the Spike Unspike option if the report is to cover a spiked sample followed by an unspiked sample Select the Spike 2 of 2 option if you want a QC Spike report where the unspiked sample is followed by the first spiked sample followed by the second spiked sample ChromQuest User Guide 269 5 Custom Reports Creating QC Reports 270 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 244 Spike Report Setup dialog box Spike Report Setup x 2 Spike 2 of 2 M Fully qualified filenames Cancel Help Select the Fully qualified filenames check box if you want to include full paths in the file names A table template is inserted into your sequence report for the sequence Spike report Note that this table contains placeholder information only and not data from your system Figure 245 Sequence Spike report SampleID Acquired UnSpiked DACHRO Multil i 1 30 97 M Data Mu 9 28 38 SETE tietoo o Monday a Spiked PDACHRO Multi 18007
156. efore alignment Em Channel A ol x Time 9 89766 Minutes Amplitude 5 5e 005 36 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Stretch Use the stretch function to perform a two point contraction or expansion of chromatograms relative to another First you select points or peaks on the first chromatogram that the second will be stretched or contracted to Then you select two points on the second chromatogram The chromatogram between these two points is stretched or contracted to fit the two points specified on the original chromatogram To undo the stretch right click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view the trace spreadsheet Click the Trace Setup tab and then scroll to the right to the X axis and Y axis offset columns where you can delete or change these settings Click Reset Scaling to restore ALL settings to their original values Figure 35 Chromatograms before stretching E Channel A Untitled Time 9 2806 Minutes Amplitude 0 003171 0 050 0 000 0 050 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 37 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Normalize Use this function to normalize one or more chromatograms to the first chromatogram adjusting the heights such that the apex height of a selected peak matches that of the peak selected on the first trace Once you have selected this command you are prompted
157. egration toolbar The Define Single Peak dialog box appears The retention time of the first detected peak is listed at the top of the dialog box ChromOQuest User Guide 55 2 Tutorial Creating a Single Level Calibration 56 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 57 Define Single Peak dialog box xi Retention time 5 50 Minutes Peak name Peaki Help Conc level E pooo Units pooo ISTD ID fo de ot P Current peak 5 r Retention time vind Total peaks 9 Relative 25 Absolute fo 38 Minutes lt lt Back Next gt gt 4 Check the retention time of the peak that is listed in the dialog box e Ifyou want to add the peak to the peak table continue to step 5 e Ifyou do not want to add this peak to the peak table continue to step 6 5 Make the appropriate entries in the dialog box for this peak a Inthe Peak Name box type the name of the peak b In the Conc Level boxes leave the level of 1 at its default and type a numeric concentration value into the second box Note Use the Conc Level boxes to enter the levels and the concentrations of your calibration standards By default the dialog box opens with a value of 1 in the first box To add a second concentration level for a peak click the peak a second time and then type 2 in the first box and its associated concentration value in the second box Continue to click on the peak and enter the concentration levels and their as
158. elected text or numeric data that exceeds the width of the cell automatically floats into the next cell if empty If this selection is Off the text or data that extends beyond the limits of the cell width is truncated or displayed with an overflow indicator selected Word wrap When this option is selected information entered into a cell is wrapped to the next line when the end of the cell is encountered Normal When this option is selected information is displayed in the default mode Overflow indicator Select the way cells that overflow are to be displayed with no indicator with an ellipsis for example cell overflow is or with a pound sign Data and information are brought into the report for display using system functions that extract the desired information from the data system To make it easy the Function Wizard enables you to select the type of information to be displayed and lets you define how it will appear on the report The result of your choices becomes a formula a combination of functions that is placed in the currently selected spreadsheet cell To insert a formula into the template select a cell of the spreadsheet where you want the data to appear Then click the Function Wizard button at the top of the spreadsheet The Function Wizard steps you through some dialog boxes that help you define the information to be inserted in the selected cell Functions are used to
159. enter the group index number for the group of interest where the first group 1 second group 2 and so on e Using Select the type of group to be reported Calibrated range and named peak groups are supported For Calibrated range groups if you have defined your group to calculate concentrations for unnamed peaks you can include these in your group reporting by selecting the appropriate options Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 285 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting 286 ChromQuest User Guide Function Wizard Dynamic Data This page only appears if you have selected the Repeating formula check box The questions here enable you to specify the source data for repeated formulas Figure 260 Function Wizard Dynamic Data page Function Wizard Dynamic Data e Repeat formula for all runs in a sequence Select this check box to extract the designated data from all runs of the sequence For example if the selected function is peak area from a sequence file this option would enable you to select one peak from a trace of the sequence and then report its area for each run in the sequence Repeat formula for all peaks or groups This option extracts the designated information for all peaks or all groups of a sequence run you select The Sequence run number prompt appears when this option is chosen For example if the selected function is peak area from a sequence file this option would extract the area for all pea
160. entific As with other areas of ChromQuest clicking the right mouse button gives you access to quick menus When you right click the calibration curve region of the window the following menu appears where you can change the characteristics of the displayed calibration curve Figure 130 Calibration Curve options menu View Fit Type Change Fit Type Scaling LSO Weighting v Force Through Zero RR TSS View Mode Replicate View Mode gt Response Factor Definition gt Print Current Peak Group Print All Peaks 4 Groups Concentration Calculator View Fit Type Select a new fit type to be displayed in the review peak calibration graph The fit is overlaid with the current calibration curve e Change Fit Type Select a new fit type to be applied to the calibration curve When you change the fit type the change is also entered into your peak table for this peak e Scaling Select a new scaling factor for the calibration curves This scaling is applied to all calibration fits displayed and is applied to the peak table for this peak LSQ Weighting Select a least squares weighting factor to apply to the calibration curves Applies only to linear cubic and quadratic fits The LSQ Weighting selected is entered in your peak table for this peak ChromQuest User Guide 141 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 142 ChromQuest User Guide Force Through Zero Select this to force the calibration curv
161. er programs to run A method can be created from one of the Instrument windows or when running an instrument offline When you create a method from an Instrument window you also have access to starting runs and viewing data acquisition When you create a method offline you do not have access to instrument control starting or stopping runs however you can view real time data Offline you can set up a complete method including instrument configuration which can be opened later and used for one of the instruments on the system This chapter describes the steps required to prepare a method for data acquisition optimize integration and set up calibration Later sections provide details on report generation and sequence operations Contents e Creating an Acquisition Method e Single Run Acquisition e Integrating the Chromatogram e Calibration Setup e Groups and Group Calibration e Advanced Method Options e Creating Multi Detector Methods e Creating Multi Wavelength Methods e Offline Instruments ChromQuest User Guide 77 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Creating an Acquisition Method Method Wizard 78 ChromQuest User Guide In order to acquire data and save it on the hard drive of your computer you must create a method that contains data acquisition information such as run time and sampling rate To create a new method or edit an existing method use the Method Wizard You can also choose File gt Metho
162. ere are two ways you can acquire data using ChromQuest One way is with a sequence for multiple runs and the other way is to make a single run To make a single data acquisition run you must specify the method to be used for analysis and a file name for data storage Note To use a method created for data acquisition from a digital to analog converter for data acquisition its instrument setup should have the acquisition channel turned on and a sampling rate and run time designated To make a single run click the Single Run button or choose Control gt Single Run from the main menu The following dialog box appears Figure 108 Single Run Acquisition dialog box Single Run Acquisition Ea Run information 2 Stet samme Galibration Evel 1 Method Cancel Data path a Projects Default Data fe Gear ancaran Help or ee gt To Geer calibration ton level eles p Fint calibration report Number of runs 1 T Print method report He i I Gear repiicates r Amount values Average replicates Sample amount T Internal standard amount 1 Multiplication factos 1 1 17 Dilution factors E ee ina e Run information This section allows you to specify files for the run Sample ID Enter a Sample ID for the run This can contain text and numbers and is saved with the data file You can also click the arrow to select from pre defined Sample IDs
163. ere you set the parameters for doing the baseline check Figure 110 Baseline Check dialog box Baseline Check Ed a To pass the baseline must meet the test criteria for 15 0 minutes Stop checking baseline if conditions are not met after fi 5 0 minutes Cancel Noise test method ims C ASTM Help Channel Enable Threshold Enable Threshold Hoise Test Noise Drift Test Drifthr Detector 1 Detector 2 To pass the baseline must meet the test criteria for This specifies the minimum time over which the baseline stability is calculated e Stop checking baseline if conditions are not met after This specifies the maximum time that is spent checking the baseline If conditions are not satisfied during this time then the baseline check fails e Noise test method This is used to specify the noise calculation method that should be applied to the acquired data Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 105 3 Method Development Single Run Acquisition 106 ChromQuest User Guide Test Spreadsheet This spreadsheet specifies the channels to be used for baseline calculations and the tests that should be performed on those channels The number of rows of the spreadsheet equals the number of acquisition channels based on instrument configuration plus the number of PDA Multichromatogram channels defined in the PDA Options Window if PDA is configured Channel Each entry in this column contains the na
164. ers during normal data acquisition Many instruments have the ability to report continuous monitoring data on status parameters such as flow rate and oven temperature When this option is enabled this tab appears allowing you to designate which status parameters you wish to monitor during the run The actual entries in this list vary depending on the instrument configuration Figure 86 Aux Trace tab E P4000 p UV6000 UV6000 Events AS3000 Sample Prep MDL Program lt Aux Traces 3 Trigger tability psi To have status information logged for a parameter listed in this dialog box click the box for that row and select the appropriate units for that parameter When data acquisition is performed status information is also acquired The resultant data is presented as an additional data channel whenever the data file is viewed Method Properties Before you use a method to acquire data be sure that the options for automatic post run analysis of the data and other options if desired are turned on To check these parameters choose Method gt Properties A tab box appears where you set the properties for the method Description Click the Description tab A dialog box appears where you can enter text information about your method You can enter any information you wish The description can be viewed from the Open File dialog box and therefore can be useful in sorting quickly through methods t
165. es tab allows to designate program files to associate with the method Figure 154 Advanced Method Options window Files tab fal Advanced Method Options FID e User programs In this section you can designate user programs to be run Before each run Before analysis of the chromatogram or After analysis of the chromatogram Enter the user program name or select it from a list by clicking the File button For details on writing user programs refer to Chapter 3 in the ChromQuest 5 0 Reference Guide e Baseline file If you want ChromQuest to automatically subtract a stored baseline file after each run select the Baseline file option Designate a baseline file name and check each channel from which the baseline file is to be subtracted The chromatogram is analyzed after the subtraction is performed Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 169 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options Advanced Method Reports This tab is used to specify one or more reports to be printed exported or both when the method is used to analyze data Figure 155 Advanced Method Options window Advanced Reports tab fed Advanced Method Options FID e Print Select this check box if you want to print the designated report when data is analyzed with this method e Export Select this check box if you want to export the designated report when data is analyzed with this method This results in tab delimited export only e Report
166. es through the origin Changing this automatically changes the peak table for this peak View Mode Select Peaks or Groups for viewing Replicate View Mode This selects how you want to view the replicate data in the calibration data spreadsheet Select Area Height to view the replicate area or heights Select Response Factor to view the replicate response factors Response Factor Definition Select how the response factors are to be calculated and displayed Area Amount or Amount Area If you select Amount Area you have access to all fit types If you select Area Amount all fits except cubic are allowed The selection of Area Amount or Amount Area for your method is located in the Method gt Properties gt Options dialog box Clear All Fits Selection of this option removes all fits to the calibration curve display Restore Original Fit This selection restores the fit originally displayed for the calibration curve Print Current Peak Group Select this option to print the currently selected peak or group information Print All Peaks Groups Select this option to print all the peaks or group information Concentration Calculator You can use the Concentration Calculator to calculate amounts based on areas or heights you input Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Figure 131 Concentration Calculator dialog box Concentration Calculator x Done Fit type Point to Point Scaling None He
167. etector 1 tab E Instrument Setup lol x B Detector 1 ee Trigger I Acquisition channel on Sampling Frequency 10 vy Hz Period z mSec Suitable for minimum peak width at base of 0 033 Min Run time fi q Min Acquisition delay jo Min Set up the acquisition parameters for your detector a Click the Detector tab b Select the Acquisition Channel On check box c Leave the data sampling at its default A sampling frequency of 10 Hz means that ChromQuest collects 10 data points per s which is adequate for peaks with a minimum width of 0 033 min at their base d Ensure that the Run Time is long enough for your last expected peak to elute If you do not know how long it will take to elute set the run time to a high number such as 100 minutes You can stop the run manually after the last peak has eluted After your first run you can then adjust the run time to a more appropriate number Click the Trigger tab and select the Trigger Type If no trigger is configured this tab does not appear The trigger for each instrument is set up during configuration Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard Figure 52 Instrument Setup dialog box Trigger tab E Instrument Setup External zi 7 When you have completed the acquisition setup information close the Instrument Setup dialog box 8 Save your method a Choose File gt Method gt Save As The Save M
168. etention Tim Resolution Select the Trace index of the channel you want to include if using a multichannel file where 1 first trace 2 second trace and so on Select Peaks or Groups from the list and then select a parameter you want to summarize from the list on the left by double clicking it You can select as many parameters as you wish If the parameter is numeric you can enter a value in the Precision box or accept the value presented Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 291 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Table Wizard Types Select the types of peaks to be included in your summary by selecting the check boxes A different set of parameters appears if you have selected Groups Figure 266 Table Wizard Types Peaks page Table Wizard Types Select the types of peaks you want to include Figure 267 Table Wizard Types Groups page Table Wizard Types For groups select the type of groups to include in the table 292 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Table Wizard Run Parameters Double click each parameter you want to include for each run in the summary table Figure 268 Table Wizard Run Parameters page Table Wizard Run Parameters Data Description Data Full Filename User Name ISTD Amount Method Filename Method Full Filename Multiplier Factor Sample Amount Sample ID 2 satom Wide Parameter ih e up Table Wiz
169. ethod Custom Report window lox Courier New fo z Bsz u panl zas BO fio z ro Sree eres me ers rye eras E even i eR a a a i aS 04 01 2003 12 46 52 PM Method Custom Report MAIN ST PHARMACEUTICALS C ChromQuest Pr oj ects Default Data multi calibration level 1 dat Minutes Note If you insert current data into your report it is updated whenever your current data changes Therefore you can see the effects of integration by clicking the Analysis button while you are in the custom report screen 244 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Insert Report There are a variety of report tables you can add to your custom report To add a report table to your custom report position your cursor on your report template at the location you wish to insert the report table right click and choose Insert Report A list of available report tables is displayed Figure 213 Insert Report options menu Insert Field gt Insert Graph gt Insert Report Baseline Check Report Insert Object Calibration Info Update Fields Calibration Table Data Audit Trail a Electronic Signatures Table praning Fraction Report Zaeni Fraction Report Margin Setup Generic Report Print Preview Instrument Activity Log Print Instrument Configuration Report Library Definition Report Header Footer Library Search Report A Toba Method Audit Trail v Ruler Meth
170. ethod Development Groups and Group Calibration Each level can have multiple replicates duplicate injections of a single standard level Rep 1 is the first calibration replicate run Rep 2 is the second replicate and so on When replicate standards are used and the Calib Weight is set to 100 the response factor is based on the true average of all replicates in the calibration level In order for replicates to be used you must select the Wt Average option in the Peak Table Calib Flag column Otherwise each injection at a given level will replace the current calibration areas heights Figure 133 Replicates displayed in Review Peak Calibration table Demo C ADATA PNA STDS 10muy PNA STDS 12 4 97 11 28 02 AM Demo C ADATA PNA_STDS 11muy PNA STDS 1224 97 11 28 09 AM Demo C ADATA PNA_STDS 12mu PNA STDS 12 4 97 10 57 54 AM C DATA PNA_STDS 13 my PNA STDS 12 4 97 10 57 58 AM C DATA PNA_STDS 14 mu PNA STDS 12 4 97 10 58 01 AM Rep 1 x User This is the logged user at the time the calibration was last performed using this replicate Rep 1 x Data File This is the data file where the replicate data is stored Rep 1 x Sample ID This is the Sample ID for the replicate sample Rep 1 x Calib Time This is the date and time the last calibration was performed using this replicate Groups and Group Calibration Thermo Scientific A group is a collection of peaks that are somehow related In
171. ethod File As dialog box appears Figure 53 Save Method File As dialog box Save Method File As f Methods v a multilevel calibration met a new column met Method files met b In the Save In box browse to the folder in which you want to save your file For example browse to the Drive ChromQuest Projects Default Methods folder c In the File name box type Test d Click Save Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 51 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard 52 ChromQuest User Guide Running a Preliminary Sample You will now use the method you just created to make your first data acquisition run If your instrument contains an autosampler place a vial in the sample tray To start a single run 1 Recall the Instrument Wizard by clicking the Instrument Wizard button in the command toolbar Then click the Run One Sample button Or choose Control gt Single Run from the menu bar The Single Run Acquisition dialog box appears Figure 54 Single Run Acquisition dialog box inate run acauisition x m Run information T Calibrate Sample ID Test lt 001 gt gt Calibration level 1 Method C Chromfluest Projects Default Method Test F Clear all calibration Cancel Data path C ChromQuest Projects Default Data J Clear calibration for level Help Data file Test lt 001 gt gt D Print calibration report z F Glear replicates Number of reps fi J Print method
172. ethod by choosing File gt Method gt Save from the menu bar If you want to save the method using a different name use the File gt Method gt Save As command Entering Peak Areas into the Method Your method must contain calibration information for each analyte that you want to quantitate To enter peak areas for your analytes into the calibration table of the method you can either run the standard sample again designated as a calibration run or you can re analyze the stored data file that you created by performing the Running a Preliminary Sample task on page 52 To create a calibration curve using a stored data file 1 If your data file is not open open it a Choose File gt Data gt Open to display the Open Data File dialog box b Browse to the appropriate directory Then click the appropriate data file in the list Note In the Files Of Type list select All Files if you did not add the dat extension to your data file name c In the Options area i From the Method list select From Results ii From the Results list select the most recent date The method with the most recent data should contain the Peak Table that you created while performing the steps in Creating a Single Level Calibration on page 55 d Click Open 58 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table 2 Choose Analysis gt Analysis Single Level Calibration from the menu bar The Analysis Single Level
173. etting Integration Parameters Graphically ChromQuest uses default integration parameters that are appropriate for most HPLC applications However you might have certain peaks that require special integration treatment Such special integration treatments are entered into your method as Integration Timed Events These events can be placed at the beginning of the run to apply to all peaks or they can be inserted at a certain place in the chromatogram such that only some peaks are affected Note You can perform this step using one of the multi calibration level dat files provided with the software To add the integration event Integration Offto your method 1 If your recently acquired data file is not open open it a Choose File gt Data gt Open to display the Open Data File dialog box b Browse to the appropriate directory Then select your data file from the list displayed Or select one of the files supplied with ChromQuest 2 Click the Analyze button to integrate the chromatogram and display the baselines Note If you do not know what a button s function is simply move the cursor over the button do not click and a Tool tip box appears showing the button s name or function ra 3 To add the Integration Off timed event click the Int Off button on the Integration Toolbar at the bottom of the Instrument window 4 As instructed in the status bar at the bottom of the window click your mouse once before the part o
174. etup Annotations Appearance Full Unzoom Clear Overlays Operations gt Print Graphical Programming Copy to Clipboard Save Trace Properties ChromQuest User Guide 43 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Print This option sends the current chromatogram window view to the printer Copy to Clipboard This option copies the current chromatogram window to the clipboard as a metafile From here you can paste the view into a word processing document or other application that supports the clipboard Note To paste into Microsoft Word you must choose Edit gt Paste Special gt Picture from the main menu Save Trace This option saves the current chromatogram window in a file You must specify a name for the file Graphical Programming This menu gives you access to the graphical method programming options This includes Integration Timed Events and options to add peaks to a peak table These menu options are also available from the Toolbar which can be turned on using the Integration Tools command A description of how to use these options is provided under Method Development and Integration Timed Events Data Acquisition and Control Options that are available from the Control menu are related to data acquisition and control of the instrument In general there are two ways to acquire data 1 single run acquisition where you acquire data for a single injection and
175. eue lists the sequence or single run Type single run or sequence Name Status and Description Notice the Status in the sample queue displays the status of the sequence or single run If you are running a sequence the Status shown in the sequence spreadsheet displays the status of an individual run in the sequence Adding to the Run Queue You can quickly add or delete items from your run queue by right clicking and choosing these options from the shortcut menu Figure 190 Run Queue dialog box aa HPLC 1 Method 1voa0905 met Data tt01la dat Project Default File Edit View Method Data Sequence Analysis Control Reports Window Help pet ee Processing Kristi McKiney Sequence Process Kristia Delete Pending Kristi McKiney Delete All v Print Method Reports v Print Sequence Reports Single Run Single Analysis Sequence Run Sequence Process imi Sequence tt seq SE ee o E B e A T 1 Acquiring Unknown 0 05 met E ttOla dat Ry Unknown 1voa0905 met Unknown 1voa0905 met Unknown 1voa0905 met tt04 dat Unknown 1voa0905 met ttO5 dat For Help press F1 Running sample TT MIM 4 Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 215 4 Sequence Operations Acquisition Using a Sequence 216 ChromQuest User Guide Delete This command deletes the selected item from the run queue Delete All This command deletes all items from the run queue Print Method Reports When method report printin
176. eview the current custom report by clicking the Print Preview button on the command ribbon or by right clicking and choosing Print Preview from the shortcut menu Use the Print Preview screen to examine one or two pages of the current report at a time Figure 240 Method Custom Report Print Preview window External Standard Report Bimpe Muki Calbrathn Los G Fiba Oh ron Qued rejom Dufauk Doederu ki csl racin bulSdoe Wedred Fara Ch ren uredi rejec Duauk Bach sddm ukila cal ration Levwe Inse ASL ZZM NADA IDIM ChromQuest Custom Method Report Thermo Finnigan 3 44 00 PID Re processed rome Peak 1 55 Peak 2 Peak 3 an2 Peak 1173278 oom cat Tote 3st oom CAL When you are in the print preview screen the cursor temporarily turns into a magnifying glass image You can click a location of the report to zoom in for details e Print Click this button to print the report e Next Page Click this button to view the next page of the report e Prev Page Click this button to view the previous page of the report e Two Pages Click this button to view two pages of the report at a time 266 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports Zoom In Click this button to zoom in on the chromatogram This has the same effect as clicking on the report when the cursor has a magnifying glass shape Zoom Out Click this button to zoom out one level e Close Click this but
177. example compound name retention time and concentration and or a variety of other sample related items Report tables can be formatted with fonts centering and decimal places Reports are inserted as tables because the number of rows is dynamic and can change from run to run e General Object items are non chromatography objects that enhance or aid in the usefulness of your report These objects can include bitmap graphics Excel spreadsheets or graphs or audio or video clips Report Templates Custom reports are templates for how data and objects will be displayed and printed A method custom report template is created and saved as part of a method but it can also be saved as a template file that can be opened from within another method and used or edited ChromQuest comes with a suite of standard report templates for all types of reports These can be used as is or modified using the Method Custom Report editor and saved as new templates Sequence custom report templates are used for reporting data generated during batch sequence operations For example certain Run Types require a report template for reporting the data When you designate a run as a Begin Summary run for example you are required to designate a template name for the summary report Other run types requiring templates include Suitability QC Check Standards and Duplicates 226 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports St
178. existing file or move it to another location first e Calibrate Do not select this box at this point as you have not prepared your method for calibration yet When you are ready click Start to begin the acquisition of your sample 2 When the run is completed the chromatogram with baselines drawn should be shown on the screen If you are starting with an already acquired data file make sure the file is open and has been analyzed If the baselines are not displayed click the Analyze button to make sure the chromatogram has been analyzed If the baseline still does not appear right click the chromatogram window and select Appearance from the shortcut menu Make sure the baseline is displayed in a color that is visible on the screen You are now ready to define your calibrated peaks There are two ways to define calibration peaks using ChromQuest Using Define Peaks you add all of the peaks of interest to the peak table and then enter names and complete level information in the peak table Using Define Single Peaks you name and define each peak as you add it to the peak table Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 123 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 124 Define Single Peak ChromQuest User Guide To add peaks to the peak table one at a time click the Define Single Peak button from the toolbar or right click and choose Graphical Programming gt Define Single Peak from the shortcut menu A dialog box appears for
179. ext box with the graph to a new location for example next to a report and then release the mouse button Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 4 To edit the chromatogram graph including annotations double click the mouse within the chromatogram graph Make sure you have selected the chromatogram and not the text box To resize the chromatogram select the text box look for the text box handles and then click and drag the handles to the desired size Note You cannot place two reports side by side Inserting an Instrument Activity Report To add a copy of the method instrument activity log right click and choose Insert Report gt Instrument Activity Log A table for the instrument activity log is inserted on your custom report This table is a template placeholder and does not display the actual instrument activity report until the custom report is printed Figure 229 Instrument activity log table Inserting an Instrument Configuration Report To add a listing of the current instrument configuration right click and choose Insert Report gt Instrument Configuration Report A table for the instrument configuration report is inserted onto your custom report template The instrument configuration information can be viewed when you right click and choose Print Preview or when the report is printed Figure 230 Instrument configuration information Exterral Events Name Source Corf guration Trigger
180. f the chromatogram where you want to turn integration off Select a section of chromatogram where one or more peaks elute Then click the mouse again at the point on the chromatogram where you want to turn integration on again The Integration Off dialog box appears Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 53 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard 54 ChromOQuest User Guide Figure 55 Integration Off dialog box Start Time 0 374 Minutes Stop Time 4 602 Minutes Value 0 lii Insert into Integration Events table Insert into Manual Integration Fixes table The points where you clicked your mouse are shown as Start Time and Stop Time The integration is turned off between these points on your chromatogram The Value is set at zero as no numeric value is required for this event Select the Insert into Integration Events table option to add the event to the Integration Events Table of your method where it will be used on all chromatograms for this wavelength channel if your method contains more than one acquisition channel analyzed using this method Note Events in the Manual Integration Fixes table are only applied to the current data file Click Analyze Now to add the event to the method and reintegrate the chromatogram Add to Table simply adds the event to the integration timed events table without reintegration Your chromatogram is redrawn using the new integration event Notice that the
181. fic range for display 240 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Figure 209 Data Graph Properties dialog box Axis Setup page Data Graph Properties Chromatography Data P Nag fear Include sample ID in legend Include data file name in lege You can also click Get Current Axis Limits to bring in the limits for the data currently displayed in your method For example if you have zoomed in on a region of the chromatogram and always want that region displayed e Margins Type a margin as a percent for top and bottom display of the graph e General Options Turn On or Off the desired settings by selecting the adjacent check boxes These act as a master switch for legends and can be turned off for each trace using the check boxes in the trace properties tab e Orientation Select whether you want the graph printed in a Landscape or Portrait orientation relative to the page This does not alter the orientation of printing the report on your printer it affects only the selected graph Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 241 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 242 ChromQuest User Guide 5 Click the Appearance tab to set the look of the graph Figure 210 New Trace Properties dialog box Appearance tab New Trace Properties f1 Current Data Channel A Kont SIze Bola Anale E ae el Ee Scheme If you have previously saved a
182. file name d In the Number Of Unknown Runs In Sequence box type 3 e Leave the other fields at default values 5 Click Next to continue to the next page of the Sequence Wizard If you added your name to the end of the data path Chrom Quest asks you if you want to create a folder Click Yes ChromQuest displays the Sequence Wizard Autosampler page Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 61 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table Figure 63 Sequence Wizard Autosampler page Sequence Wizard Autosampler 6 In the Sequence Wizard Autosampler page enter information that applies to the autosampler a Type the appropriate vial locations in the First Vial box for the Unknowns and the First Vial box for the calibration standards Type the appropriate values in the Increment By boxes For example in this Tutorial place four standard 1 8 mL vials into your autosampler in positions Al through A4 e For the Surveyor Autosampler type As2 in the First Vial box for the Unknown Vials Of Sequence Leave the Increment By value at its default of 1 Type As1 in the First Vial box for the Calibration Vials Of Sequence e Fora SpectraSYSTEM autosampler type A02 in the First Vial box for the Unknown Vials Of Sequence Leave the Increment By value at its default of 1 Type AO1 in the First Vial box for the Calibration Vials Of Sequence b Leave the value in the Autosampler Injection Volume box at its default The
183. format 01 12 Day of year as decimal number 001 366 Month as decimal number 01 12 Minute as decimal number 00 59 A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock Second as decimal number 00 59 Week of year as decimal number with Sunday as first day of week 00 51 Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is 0 Week of year as decimal number with Monday as first day of week 00 51 Default Date representation Default Time representation Year without century as decimal number 00 99 Year with century as decimal number Time zone name or abbreviation no characters if time zone is unknown e Distance to frame The values you enter here determine how far the header and footer are placed from the edge of the paper This value is independent of the paper margin and if set incorrectly can result in overlap with the body of the report When you click OK the header and footers defined become part of your template however they do not appear yet To view the header and footer click Print Preview and zoom in to see the details Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 279 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Formatting the spreadsheet To format the general characteristics of your advanced report right click the the spreadsheet and choose Grid Properties A dialog box opens where you can customize the grid size margins page order and default cell style Figure 256 Grid Properties dialog box
184. g box with a number in parentheses the Sample ID has a unique number attached to it The Sample ID is saved in the data file ChromQuest User Guide 205 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet Method This is the name of the method to be used for data acquisition and processing If you do not know the name of the method click the Open file button to select it from a list of available methods on your disk File name Enter a file name to be used for storing the raw data from the run If you entered a data file name in the New Sequence dialog box and designated a number in parentheses the file name already has a unique number appended to it Sample Amt The sample amount value is used as a divisor during calculation of concentrations It is intended to compensate for differences between samples due to weighing and when percentages of the total sample are being calculated rather than the amount detected in an injection ISTD Amt For calibration runs the internal standard amount is taken from the method Peak table For unknown runs enter the amount of the internal standard in your unknown sample Multiplier 1 2 3 Enter up to three multiplication factors to be used for this run All quantitated peaks are multiplied by these factors Dilutor 1 2 3 Enter up to three dilution factors to be used for this run All quantitated peaks are divided by these factors Conc Click this to enter
185. g is an example of a QC Spike report template Spike1 brp where the unspiked sample is followed by the spiked sample Figure 246 OC Spike report Type File Sample ID Acquired UnSpiked C ChromQuest data multi calibration Multilevel Calibration Level 3 11 26 90 8 49 21 PM level 3 dat Spiked C ChromQuest data multi calibration Multilevel Calibration Level 4 11 26 90 3 49 34 PM level 4 dat Channel A Compound Unsp iked Spiked Spike Conc Spike Low High Status Cone Amount Recovery Limit Limit Peakl 30 000 10 000 40 000 100 000 90 000 110000 OK Peak2 7 000 1 500 2 000 66 667 75 000 123 000 OK Peak3 25 000 4 500 30 000 111 111 90 000 110000 OK Peak4 30 000 10 000 40 000 100 000 90 000 110000 OK The following equation is used in this QC Spike report Sold Reavy 100 x Spiked Conc Unspiked Conc j j Spiked Amt The following is an example of a QC Spike report template Spike2 brp where the unspiked sample is followed by the first spiked sample 1 followed by the second spiked sample 2 Figure 247 OC Spike report Type File Sample ID Acquired UnSpiked C ChromQuest data multi calibration level Multilevel CalibrationLevel3 11 26 90 8 49 21 PM 3 dat Spike 1 C Chromquest data multi calibration level Multilevel Calibration Level 4 11 26 90 3 49 34 PM 4 dat Spike2 C ChromQuest data multi calibration level Multilevel CalibrationLevel 5 11 26 90 8 51 56 PM 5 dat Channel A Compound Unspiled Siel Spie
186. g is turned on for the highlighted queue entry a check mark appears To turn the Method reports printing function off for the selected queue entry choose Print Method Reports to remove the check mark Print Sequence Reports When sequence report printing is turned on for the highlighted queue entry a check mark appears To turn the Sequence reports printing function off for the selected queue entry choose Print Sequence Reports to remove the check mark Single Run This command adds a single run acquisition to the run queue Single Analysis This command adds a single run reprocessing analysis single level calibration to the run queue Sequence Run This command adds a sequence run to the run queue Sequence Process This command adds a sequence for processing to the run queue Note If you are currently reprocessing a sequence you must have the Results review pause after each run option selected in order to submit an additional sequence to the queue If you are reprocessing a sequence without this option selected you must stop the sequence select the Results review pause after each run option and then start the sequence again At this point you can submit one or more sequences to the queue If there is a sequence or single run acquisition in process Submit and Submit Priority buttons appear instead of a Start button Thermo Scientific Priority Samples 4 Sequence Operations Bracketed Calibrations Figure 191 Singl
187. g of a group window Click the mouse again to the right of the last peak to be included in the group window This defines the end of the group window Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration 6 If you want to add additional peak regions to the same group repeat the above procedure as many times as necessary When you are finished adding peaks to the group press the ESC key The Define Groups dialog box appears where you can give the group a name and number and where you can designate a reference peak and internal standard for the group Figure 139 Define Groups dialog box Define Groups x J Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks in group Group name Group s s ali Group type Calibrated Rane H Cancel Quantitate group on veo Si t iY Help ISTD ID oO Ref ID oO Units Jug mL IV Include named peaks dili Group name Type a name to be assigned to this group Group type Select Calibrated Range for the type of group you want to define Quantitate group on Select whether you want to use Area or Height for calculation of response factors Note If you are doing both Peak and Group quantitation using internal standards both Peaks and Groups must use the same quantitation measurement type area or height ISTD ID If you wish to use an internal standard method for the group calibration you must add to your sample a known amou
188. ge Definition X Defined ranges for this group Region Start 0 18569 6 13089 IV Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks in group Cancel Help Select the Include named peaks option if you want to include in the group any named calibrated peaks that fall within the range If this is not selected the named peaks eluting within this region are not considered part of the group Selecting the Calculate concentrations for unnamed peaks option causes the concentrations of the unnamed uncalibrated peaks in the group to be calculated using the group response factor and listed in the peak report The peak report includes the unnamed peak concentrations but does not report the group concentration as a peak The group concentration is reported in a separate group report section Note When this check box is selected the total group area and height are not reported as part of the peak table so the Area and Height columns in the peak report add up to 100 If Groups are reported in the run report a separate report section is generated that only includes groups This is the only place where the total group concentration using this option can be viewed If this box is cleared the group is reported as part of the peak table and the Area Height concentrations could add up to more than 100 Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration For examples of reports using various Calibrate
189. gnated whenever you analyze your chromatogram 166 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options Column Performance Parameters Use the Column Performance tab to set up automatic calculation of system performance values such as Theoretical Plates Capacity Factor Resolution or Peak Asymmetry Figure 153 Advanced Method Options window Column Performance tab fal Advanced Method Options FID 8988 787 3 10 00 Select the Calculate performance parameters for this channel option Then fill in the information for the given fields required for the calculations e Column Information Unretained peak time min Type the retention time of an unretained peak for this column Column length meters Type the length of the column in meters Particle diameter microns Type the particle diameter in microns for the column you are using if applicable Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 167 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options Column serial number Type the serial number for the column if applicable This information is saved with the data and available for reporting Column installation date Type the date the column was installed in the instrument if desired This information is saved with the data and available for reporting Column description Type a column description if desired This information is saved with the data and avail
190. group concentration is reported in a separate group report section Note When this check box is selected the total group area and height are not reported as part of the peak table so the Area and Height columns in the peak report add up to 100 If Groups are reported in the run report a separate report section is generated that only includes groups This is the only place where the total group concentration using this option can be viewed If this box is not selected the group is reported as part of the peak table and the Area Height concentrations might add up to more than 100 For examples of reports using various Calibrated Range options see the examples in Group Calibration Calibrated Range on page 150 7 When you have completed the dialog box entries click OK A row is added to your Group table containing the information you entered After the group has been defined you must enter calibration levels into the group table and then run the calibration samples to determine the group response factors See Group Table on page 153 and Group Range Definition on page 156 for information on completing the group calibration setup After you have completed your group setup and calibration the peaks in the defined groups appear on your chromatogram if you have the peaks annotation on Thermo Scientific Group Table Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration To view the Grou
191. h all instruments installed and properly configured The following list gives you a quick view of what the Tutorial contains If you are just starting to use ChromQuest perform all the topics in the Tutorial in the order presented If you are upgrading from a previous version of ChromQuest follow the Tutorial to become familiar with how ChromQuest 5 0 is different from what you used before Step 1 Using the Instrument Wizard Step 2 Creating an Acquisition Method optional Setting up the acquisition parameters Running a preliminary sample Setting integration parameters graphically Step 3 Creating a Single Level Calibration Creating a peak table for the identification and quantitation of your chromatographic peaks Running a single level calibration Step 4 Creating a Sequence Table Step 5 Running a Sequence Step 6 Using The Tutorial Files Reviewing a multi level calibration Exploring a peak table e Examining a custom report e What IF changing integration parameters ChromQuest User Guide 41 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard Using the Instrument Wizard If you are new to ChromQuest use the built in Instrument Wizard to locate and step through the dialog boxes necessary to acquire and process data To start this Tutorial open the Instrument Wizard 1 Do one of the following e For ChromQuest go to step 2 e For ChromQuest SI choose Start gt Programs gt Chromatogra
192. he legend including color is done on the Appearance page for the Graph item Note If you have not turned on the legend in the Axis Setup dialog box this box has no effect Data source Enter the name of the file from which to get the trace You can also click File adjacent to the field and select a data source The data source can be a chromatogram or it can be a stored profile such as a temperature or flow program Current Data Use this to select a trace from the current chromatography data Open Data Use this to select a stored data file from which you can select a trace for display Current Method Use this to select a trace from the current method if available An example of traces from a method include temperature profiles for instrument control e Trace Select the channel to be displayed Scale to Select one of these scaling options Trace x Scales to another trace in the window Autoscale to largest peak Scales such that the largest peak is on scale Autoscale to 2nd largest peak Scales such that the 2nd largest peak is on scale Autoscale to 3rd largest peak Scales such that the 3rd largest peak is on scale User Defined Select this to enter a value for Y max and min Thermo Scientific Removing a Trace Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Normalized Select this to normalize one trace to fit on the graph
193. he path e Data File Checksum If Extended Security is enabled a checksum is calculated for the entire file whenever the data file is closed When the file is opened its checksum is verified first If the check fails the file cannot be opened and an error message appears in the instrument activity log Checksum verification when enabled is enterprise wide The checksum feature is enabled from the Main menu choose Tools gt Options gt General and is labeled Extended Security The default mode for this feature is On GLP Good Laboratory Practices Extended Security ChromQuest User Guide In order to adhere to good laboratory practices ChromQuest does not normally let you overwrite a data file If you try to overwrite an existing data file name the system either gives you an error message or triggers a failure action if encountered during a Sequence operation If you need to re use a data file name use Windows 2000 XP utilities to rename the file store it in an alternate location on your disk or both If for some reason you wish to ignore GLP and have access to overwriting of data files your files must be located in a directory whose path contains the term public For example if your data files are saved in a directory entitled C Public Data the ChromQuest files saved in this directory can be overwritten This selection is on by default Selecting this option causes a checksum to be calculated whenever a data file is
194. hromOQuest User Guide 263 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports 264 In order for your sequence report to contain valid Calibration Report information when it is printed you must make sure your method and sequence are set up to create a sequence calibration report Make sure your Method Peak table contains RF RSD Limit values for peaks in your calibration Also make sure the sequence table contains correct Run Types for Begin Calibration End Calibration and Print Calibration at the appropriate runs in the sequence OLE Object Linking and Embedding ChromQuest custom reports have full OLE support This means you can add objects that are linked to other Windows 2000 XP applications such as Excel You can even add a video clip or voice recording to your report These items are added as Objects to your report Adding Graphs Charts Bitmaps Logos Word Documents ChromQuest User Guide To add an object to your report position your cursor on the custom report at the location where you want to insert the object Right click and choose Insert Object from the shortcut menu A dialog box opens where you can select the type of object you want to add Figure 238 Insert Object dialog box Insert Object 2x oaths Create New Bitmap Image Cancel C Create from Fil Calendar Control i a EasyPhoto Photograph Equation GPIBServer Document T Display As Icon Result There are a variety of object types to insert based on the
195. hromatogram System wide parameters can be displayed in a custom report and are printed at the bottom of the report An example of a System wide parameter is a BTU calculation where the program multiplies each peak by its BTU content and then sums the calculated BTU values providing a single value equal to the BTU content of the entire mixture A Per peak parameter is one that is calculated once for each peak in the chromatogram Per peak parameters can be displayed in a custom report column similar to the way the peak number or concentration would be displayed Per peak parameters can also be annotated on the chromatogram An example of a Per peak parameter is HETP height equivalent to a theoretical plate For HETP the Custom Parameter program takes the length of the column in centimeters and divides it by n the theoretical plates for the component that is already calculated by the system 3 Select Number or String from the Returns list to select what type of parameter is returned by the parameter calculation 4 Select the custom parameter file from the Source File dialog box This program must be a Windows DLL that satisfies all the requirements for a custom parameter program given in the User Program appendix of this manual 5 Use the Additional Parameters field as necessary for your custom parameter application Once you have a custom parameter defined in your method ChromQuest attempts to run the Custom Parameter Programs desi
196. iew Peak Calibration section of the method Creating a Sequence Table If you are using an autosampler to inject samples you must define the samples to be injected and how they are to be acquired and analyzed This is done using a sample Sequence A sample Sequence can be used to acquire both calibration and unknown samples It can also be used to automatically re analyze stored data files Details on creating and using a sequence are located in Chapter 4 Sequence Operations In this part of the Tutorial you will create and use a simple sequence to acquire a calibration sample and three unknown samples Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 59 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table To create a new sequence for the acquisition of data files 1 Recall the Instrument Wizard by clicking the Instrument Wizard button in the command toolbar Then click the Create A Sequence button Or choose File gt Sequence gt Sequence Wizard from the menu bar The Sequence Wizard Method page appears Figure 61 Sequence Wizard Method page Sequence Wizard Method Chrom uest Projects D efault Methods T est met Fy g Back Finish 2 On the Sequence Wizard Method page a Type the method to be used for the acquisition or select the name from a list of available methods by clicking the File Open button If you are following the Tutorial enter Test met as your method name b Select the Fo
197. il to display the Audit Trail listing for the current method If the audit trail option is turned on for the current method this box displays the logged changes to the method Figure 4 Method Audit Trail window E Method Audit Trail Of x User Logged Sowce Ativity Reson System 4 3 97 10 17 26 4M Integration Events Added Enabled Yes Type Width Width c System 4 3 97 10 17 26 4M Named Peaks P Calibration Weight changed from Oto Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Peaks Calibration Flag changed from Repla Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M Named Peaks Calibration Weight changed from Oto Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Peaks Calibration Flag changed from Repla Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 M Named Peaks Calibration Weight changed from Oto Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Peaks Calibration Flag changed from Repla Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Peaks Expected Retention Time changed fr Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Peaks Calibration Weight changed from Oto Averag System 4 3 97 10 17 26 AM Named Peaks Calibration Flag changed from Repla Averag vov e User The user who was logged on to the system at the time of the change Logged The time the change was logged on to the system e Source The method location of the change that is peak table e Activity The change that was made ChromQuest User Guide 7 1
198. ile gt Instrument Activity Log gt Display Log A window with the Instrument Activity Log appears The window displays the User who used the instrument the time the activity was logged into the Instrument Activity Log and a description of the activity 96 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Figure 101 Instrument Activity Log window o x 10 21 2001 8 21 18 PM Sequence Acquire and analyze R Run Br Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 8 15 16 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 518 Surveyor System3 Ei System 10 21 2001 8 09 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 517 Surveyor System3i System 10 21 2001 8 03 22 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 516 Surveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 57 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 515 Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 7 51 20 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 514 Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 7 45 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 513 Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 7 39 21 PM SPEC_5S Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 512 Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 7 33 28 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 511 Surveyor System3 m System 10 21 2001 7 27 24 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 510 Surveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 21 23 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 509 Su
199. ile Properties dialog box Audit Trail page Data File Properties Ed Description Audit Trail Prompt for reason 90 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Electronic Signatures Users whose privileges include data results sign off can electronically sign off results To access the data results sign off choose Data gt Apply Electronic Signature from the menu bar Figure 94 Apply Electronic Signature dialog box Apply Electronic Signature f User name Jibenson G Password XXXXXXXXXX Domain TMO LAB Reason Reviewed O Cancel Help Enter your name password and domain In the Reason box you must also type a reason or select one from the list Your electronic signature will be logged into the data file audit trail if enabled Reason options include Reviewed Ready for Review Approved and Ready for Approval Once you have clicked Signoff the data is locked to further analysis Each data file can have multiple electronic signatures with no maximum Revoke Electronic Signature Thermo Scientific Users with appropriate rights can also revoke an electronic signature using the Data gt Revoke Electronic Signatures command No reason is required to revoke electronic signatures although you may add one if desired Once you have revoked the electronic signatures all electronic signatures are revoked for the data file
200. ill set up a single level calibration Setting up any type of calibration involves the following steps e Identifying the Named Peaks and entering their concentration levels in the Peak Table section of the method e Running the calibration standards to enter peak areas into the calibration table The easiest way to enter calibration information into the method is to run a calibration standard Then use the stored data file from this run to graphically define the peaks for your analytes If you have been following the Tutorial you already have a stored data file named Test001 dat If have not already run a preliminary sample you can run a preliminary sample by following the procedure in the topic Running a Preliminary Sample on page 52 or you can select one of the data files provided with ChromQuest These data files are located in the following directory Drive Chrom Quest Projects Default Data The LabTest data files contain scan data from a PDA detector The multicalibration level data files contain one wavelength channel Creating the Peak Table Thermo Scientific To create a peak table for the identification and quantitation of analytes 1 Open your stored data file by choosing File gt Data gt Open Select your data file from the list or select one of the Chrom Quest files 2 Click the Analyze button to integrate the chromatogram and show the baselines 3 Click the Define Single Peak button on the Int
201. in menu choose File gt Open File or click in the toolbar Figure 6 Open File menu ra Open Method Open Sequence When you select one of the types of files to open a dialog box appears where you can select the file from those on your hard disk The Open Data File dialog box contains the most options for how you want to open and search for files The list of files of the type selected Files of type is shown As with most Windows NT applications you can view these as a list and show details by clicking the appropriate button at the upper right corner of the window In addition you can see a preview of the chromatogram in the data file by clicking Preview Chromatogram or view the file description by clicking Description You can also use the wildcard character to view a list of certain file types Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific Figure 7 Open Data File dialog box Look in Data 4 ael a LabTest2001 dat LabTest2002 dat a LabTest2003 dat a LabTest2004 dat a LabTest2005 dat LabTest2006 dat fa LabTest2007 dat a multi calibration level 1 dat a multi calibration level 2 dat a multi calibration level 3 dat ja multi calibration level 4 dat a multi calibration level S dat multi calibration level 6 dat sa QCOO1 dat Qc002 dat a STDOO1 dat a STDOO2 dat a SysSuitO01 dat SysSuitoo2 dat a SysSuitO03 dat File name
202. in the table otherwise the export fails You must create a new table for ODBC export if you change the list of export parameters Note Microsoft Data Access Components MDAC 2 5 or higher is required for ODBC export A version of this is on the ChromQuest CD ROM under Updates Once the Export page is completed it becomes part of the method If the Export Enabled option is selected the designated data is exported every time an analysis is performed using this method Custom Parameters A custom parameter is a user defined calculation whose result is calculated by a Windows executable program Custom parameters can be reported in a custom report or exported as a result The user supplies custom parameter programs To set up custom parameters for the method click the Custom Parameters tab in the Advanced Method Options window Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 165 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options Figure 152 Advanced Method Options Custom Parameters window fal Advanced Method Options FID Of x Export Custom Parameters Column Performance Files Advanced Reports Parameter Name Type F System wide v Number 1 To define a Custom Parameter type the title you want to use to report the result in the Parameter Name column 2 Double click under the Type column You are given a choice of System wide or Per peak A System wide parameter is one that is calculated once for the whole c
203. ine the Instrument Wizard displays the following buttons for creating methods creating sequences or processing a stored sequence Figure 3 Instrument Wizard Offline window Instrument Wizard New Instrument Offline x Create or modify a method Help Create a sequence ER Process a sequence J Show at instrument startup Program Architecture and Data Structure ChromQuest is divided into several application areas Instrument application areas are used for development of methods and sample sequences when access to the instrument itself is required This is also where you have access to the chromatograph and real time data The offline processing area is available for developing methods creating and using sample sequences for reprocessing of stored data while the instruments are in use for sample acquisition or method development System Administration and Board Configuration are available for setting up system resources Method File Structure ChromQuest User Guide A method is used whenever you acquire or reprocess a data file or both It contains instructions for data acquisition run time sampling rate and so on integration calibration and peak information and reports as well as optional functions such as data export and user programs Each method is capable of acquiring multiple independent channels of data from a Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data St
204. ion bracketed calibrations 217 creating calibrations graphically 122 defining peaks 126 defining single peak 124 external standards 112 internal standards 112 peak tables 128 replicates and averaging 113 running calibration samples 136 single level and multiple level 112 steps for creating a calibration 121 theory 111 using stored data file 136 calibration averaging as part of single run or sequence 119 calibration averaging on or off 115 calibration data source 250 calibration setup 111 chromatogram operations 34 chromatogram window description 17 time and amplitude 18 chromatography graph properties 31 column performance parameters 167 creating a sequence with the Sequence Wizard 180 ChromQuest User Guide 301 Index D custom parameters definition 165 per peak 166 system wide 166 custom reports adding calibration information 250 anatomy 226 axis setup 239 borders and shading 231 calibration curves 249 calibration tables 252 changing report table parameters 257 chromatogram appearance 242 chromatograms and graphs 236 cut copy paste 233 data graph properties 237 drawing lines and boxes 232 editing a calibration report 248 entering text information 230 fields 226 233 general object items 226 graph items 226 headers and footers 233 instrument activity log 259 instrument configuration report 259 method audit trail report 259 method custom reports 227 method report 247 overview 225 print preview 266
205. is is the default recommended selection The default averaging is explained in the next section Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 115 3 Method Development Calibration Setup If you wish to use a rolling average you must enter the number of replicates to use in the rolling average For details on how rolling average works see the Rolling Average Calibration on page 118 Figure 117 Method Properties Calibration dialog box Method Properties x Number of replicates in rolling average Response factor definition Area Amount Amount Area When the automatic averaging of replicates is selected averaging of all replicates for a given level is performed until the replicates are cleared If a sequence calibration or sequence reprocessing calibration is performed automatic averaging of all replicates for a given level occurs automatically at the end of a series of calibration replicates for that level The area height average at that point is saved in the method as Last Area When a new level is encountered the replicates for the previous level are cleared automatically from the method Note Averaging only occurs for peaks where the Calib Flag is designated as Wt Average If you turn automatic averaging off be aware that for peaks whose Calib Flag is set to Wt Average no results are calculated until you force averaging by setting the Run Type to Average Replicates in either a single run
206. keting option calculation of results is handled so that the calibration standards are processed before calculation of the unknown results regardless of the fact that the calibration standards are bracketed around the unknown samples Bracketing can also be performed as part of sequence reprocessing e Standard Bracketing If you choose this method of bracketing calibration ChromQuest calculates each group of unknowns based on the response factors determined by the calibration standards directly before and after the unknown group in the sequence ChromQuest User Guide 217 4 Sequence Operations Bracketed Calibrations 218 e Standard Bracketing with Clear Calibration This method uses the Standard mode of bracketing calibrations but clears the calibration before the start of each calibration set You can then run each bracket independent of others e Sequence Bracketing If you choose this option for bracketing the results for unknown samples are calculated based on the response factors generated by the entire sequence of calibration standards regardless of their position in the sequence Calibration takes place after all samples and standards have been run e Sequence Bracketing with Back Calculation This method of bracketing uses the sequence bracketing method and then back calculates and reports amounts for the calibration runs by using the final calibration curves Example of bracketing calibrations ChromQuest User
207. ks in group Because the concentration of the uncalibrated range is calculated from the manual response factor it is not necessary to enter values for any other field except Units for reporting 8 When you have completed the dialog box click OK A row is added to your Group table containing the information you entered To view the Group Table click the Peak Group Tables button in the toolbar Click the Groups tab to view the group information table Enter a response factor to be used for the uncalibrated range group in the Manual RF column for the group Reference ID If you are using a reference peak enter its Peak ID number from the Peak table for the peak to be used as a reference peak The retention time of the reference peak is used to adjust the start and end times of the group windows Note that the reference peak must be identified in the Peak table and given an expected retention time The reference peak does not need to have calibration levels assigned to it Figure 137 Peak Group Tables Groups window Peak Group Tables Detector A Te e Ln La eo ae ee Uncalibrated Group oo O a EE jE JE ChromQuest User Guide 149 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration 150 No other parameters are necessary Close the Peak Group Tables window Be sure to save your method Group Calibration Calibrated Range ChromQuest User Guide Calibrated Range grouping calibrates and a
208. ks or groups of the chosen sequence run Repeat formula for all runs in a sequence and Repeat for all peaks or groups If you select both options the formula is repeated for all runs and all peaks groups of the sequence For example if the selected function is peak area from a sequence file the combination of these options would produce a listing of areas for all peaks in every sequence run Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Function Wizard Data Direction This screen asks how you want the data series to be displayed either across the row or down a column Figure 261 Function Wizard Data Direction page Function Wizard Data Direction Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 287 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Function Wizard Types Use this page to select the peak or group information Figure 262 Function Wizard Types Peaks page Function Wizard Types Peaks e Using Select the check boxes for the type of peaks you will use e Trace index Select the trace number if multi channel files where the first trace 1 second trace 2 and so on 288 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Figure 263 Function Wizard Types Groups page Function Wizard Types Groups When you select groups to generate the data the following choices appear e Using Select the type of group to be reported Calibrated range and named
209. l Spiel Sie pile Spike Relate Mean Low High Status Peakl 30 000 10 000 40 000 100 000 20000 50 000 100 000 0 000 100 000 90 000 110000 OK Peak2 7 000 1 500 3000 66 667 2 000 9000 100 000 0 400 33 333 75 000 125000 OK Peak 25 000 4500 30 000 111 111 10 000 35 000 100 000 0 105 105 556 90 000 110000 OK Peal 30 000 10 000 40 000 100 000 21000 50000 95 238 0 049 97 619 90 000 110 000 OK The following equations are used in this QC Spike report 100 x Spiked Conc Unspiked Conc Spiked Amt Spike Recovery Spike 1 Recovery Spike 2 Recovery 2 Mean Recovery Relative Diff Spike 1 Recovery Spike 2 Recovery Mean Recovery Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 271 5 Custom Reports Creating QC Reports Sequence Duplicate Report If you want your sequence report to include a Sequence Check Standard report right click and choose Insert Report gt Sequence Duplicate from the shortcut menu You will be prompted whether you want to include Fully Qualified file names Select the check box if you want to include full paths in the file names A table template is inserted into your sequence report for the sequence duplicate report Note that this table contains placeholder information only and not data from your system Figure 248 Sequence Duplicate report File Acquired Dup 1 DACHROM 1 30 97 i Data Multical 9 28 38 cre OOL anp Monday Dup 2 CHROM Multi 1 1 30 97 oOo bo c
210. lable graphic events appears These events are also available from the Integration Toolbar if displayed Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 107 3 Method Development Integrating the Chromatogram Figure 111 Graphical Programming options menu Graphical Programming gt Integration Tools Note Before attempting to add integration timed events make sure your chromatogram has been analyzed using the current method To make sure look for baselines and start stop tic marks on your chromatogram Alternatively click the Analyze button in the toolbar 108 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Integrating the Chromatogram Graphically Setting Width From the graphical programming list click Width Or click the Width button on the toolbar Follow the instructions in the status bar at the bottom of the window to optimize the width integration parameter Click once at the beginning of your narrowest peak then once again at the end of the narrowest peak ChromQuest will suggest a width value Select Analyze Now to add it to your method and reintegrate using the new width value Click Add to Table if you want to simply add the event to your integration timed events table and go on without integrating the chromatogram at this point The Manual Integration Fixes table is used for special baseline integration and is described below Do not select this option now unless you want this timed event to apply
211. le runs You can use a sequence to automate calibration either at the time the runs are acquired or post acquisition by sequence reprocessing You can set up run queues for automatic running of sequences and you can trigger events based on results of a run in a sequence Once a sequence is acquiring data you can pause it cancel it insert priority samples into it or queue another sequence to start A sequence is displayed as a spreadsheet with each row representing a chromatography run or a file to be reprocessed For each row you designate a method a data file name and whether the sample is a calibration standard along with various options for how you want the data to be processed Details for each option of a sequence are given later in this chapter After you create a sequence you can enable the Sequence audit trail feature Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard The Sequence Wizard is used to create a new sequence To start the Sequence Wizard choose File gt Sequence gt Sequence Wizard from the menu bar or click the Create a Sequence button from the Instrument Wizard 180 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard Sequence Wizard Method Specify a method to be used for the sequence or select it from a list of existing methods by clicking the File open button Figure 162 Sequence Wizard Method page Sequence Wizard Method x C Chrom
212. level calibration for example you have more than one calibration standard mixture you should repeat this process for each standard concentration level you plan to inject For example assume you have a multi level calibration where component A is present in standard mixture 1 at 10 ppm in standard mixture 2 at 20 ppm and in standard mixture 3 at 30 ppm You would enter 10 in the Level 1 column 20 in the Level 2 column and 30 in the Level 3 column Note Occasionally a situation can arise where one or more named components might not be present in the calibration level mixture To avoid introducing error in your calibration curve you can cause the component area to be ignored at that level by leaving the Level of interest blank for that component Click the cell and press the DELETE key e STD ID If you wish to calculate the concentration of a peak for which you have no standard sample you can designate that the calibration curve of a different peak be used Using STD Mult see the next bullet you can multiply the result to arrive at a proportional number 132 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup STD Mult If you have designated another peak to be used to calculate concentration enter a multiplier to be used here The equation used to calculate the concentration of the peak of interest then becomes Mults Conci f Areai x Mult where f the calib
213. librated peaks it is not necessary for the chromatogram to be analyzed in order to create the group 1 If you do not currently have the data file open click the Open Files button Open the data file that contains the ranges you wish to include in your group 2 Click the Analyze button Make sure all the peaks you wish to include in the group are detected Optional 3 Click the Define Group button or right click and choose Graphical Programming gt Define Group from the shortcut menu With this function you define one or more group windows using the mouse The regions defined by the mouse become the uncalibrated ranges for the group You can define any regions in the chromatogram whether or not peaks are present 4 Click the mouse once at a point on the chromatogram where you wish to define the beginning of the group region 5 Click the mouse again to define the end of the group region 6 If you want to add additional peak regions to the same group repeat the above procedure as many times as necessary When you are finished adding regions to the group press the ESC key A dialog box appears for the group 7 Select Uncalibrated Range for Group type and enter a name for Group name Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Figure 136 Define Groups dialog box Define Groups Uncalibrated Range IV Include named peaks El Calculate concentration for unnamed pea
214. lick once in the field Then choose one of the formatting buttons to change the formatting to the desired appearance You can change formatting for both column headings and sample data areas e Change Column Titles Headers ChromQuest enters default titles for each parameter selected for the report You can change the column titles in the Column Header dialog box Right click and choose Report Properties gt Column Header You cannot change the data fields other than formatting changes The shortcut menu gives you access to commands for modifying the report table When you right click the report title row the following shortcut menu appears Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Figure 226 Method custom report Report Properties options menu Change Report Parameter Use this option to change a report parameter without redefining the report Right click the title of one of the report parameters Select Change Parameter to delete the current parameter and select a new parameter to take its place in the report Figure 227 Change Parameter window Change Parameter ESTD concentration ISTD concentration NORM concentration Width Capacity factor The current parameter is selected To change it click another parameter in the list and then click OK Text This option gives you access to changing the default report table font and justification for the report Thermo Scientific
215. lly for each data file you should make sure that the Line Number or Increment Number is included somewhere in the file name e Number of calibration levels Enter the total number of calibration levels to be run in the sequence e Repetitions per level Enter the number of repetitions or re injections for each calibration level Clear all calibration at start of sequence Select this option if you want to clear all calibration information response factors replicates before the first run of the sequence Create a separate row in the sequence for each repetition Select this option if you want to create a separate row for each calibration repetition in your sequence If you do not select this option a separate data file is created for each calibration repetition however the repetitions do not appear in the sequence spreadsheet Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 187 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard e Multiple calibration sets Select this option if you plan to run each calibration level plus its replicates more than once Number of unknown runs between sets If you have selected Multiple calibration sets this option appears Enter the number of unknown samples to be run between each calibration set If you have an autosampler with control installed the vials options become available Intersperse calibration vials with unknown vials If you want to run unknown samples be
216. lp LSO weighting None IV Force through zero Area fo Concentration Fit type Select a fit type to be used to calculate the concentration or area Scaling If desired select a scaling factor to be used for the calculation LSQ weighting Select a least squares weighting factor to be used if desired Force through zero Select this check box if you want the curve forced through the origin for the calculation Area If you want to calculate an Amount enter an area that represents the peak to calculate and then click Calculate e Viewing Calibration Data When you select a peak from the peak list the calibration data for that peak is displayed in the spreadsheet at the top of the window Each row in the spreadsheet represents a calibration level for that compound Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 143 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 144 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 132 Calibration data spreadsheet Amount Ratio Area Ratio Last Area Ratio 0 0670692 0 745498 0 0670692 0 001 48804 0 116176 0 860765 0 116176 0 00332358 0 172302 0 870566 0 172302 0 0019511 0 206981 0 966272 0 206981 0 0061289 0 255611 0 97805 0 255611 0 00774031 0 313444 0 957108 0 313444 0 0104466 0 372136 0 940516 0 372136 0 0148518 0 370692 1 07906 0 386275 0 462859 0 972219 0 462859 0 00218858 0 521291 0 959157 0 521291 0 00682796
217. ltiple Traces The Open File dialog box appears where you can choose the traces to be displayed by selecting them from the file list To add a file either click the file name and then click Add or double click the file name from the list ChromQuest User Guide 21 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 22 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 18 Open data file dialog box Open data file ia LabTest2001 dat a LabTest2003 dat a LabTest2004 dat LabTest2005 dat fa LabTest2006 dat LabTest2002 dat a LabTest2007 dat a multi calibration level 1 dat a multi calibration level 2 dat a multi calibration level 3 dat multi calibration level 4 dat a multi calibration level 5 dat Once you have added a data file to the list you can select the channel by clicking the Trace cell and then selecting from the list of options If multiple channels for that file are available select the desired channel To delete a trace from the display list click its name or its number and then click Delete When you are ready to open the multiple traces click Open The selected files channels appear in your chromatogram window Figure 19 Chromatogram window with multiple traces Channel A Ehannet Ab Charmer ir Channel A P NA STDS ANA STDS PHA STDS Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Chromatogram
218. m reports you can add a Data Graph and a Run Report for each trace that you want to review You can also create custom advanced reports that allow you to report data from multiple analysis channels 172 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Offline Instruments Offline Instruments Use starting and instrument offline to create and edit methods and sequences and do post run data analysis while data is being acquired on the instrument It is also a convenient way to perform these operations or view real time data acquisition from a network PC that might not be in the laboratory All functions described in Method Development Sequence Operations and Custom Reporting are available when you are running an instrument offline The only commands not available in Offline Processing are the Control commands that directly affect start and stop of data acquisition Starting Offline Processing Offline Instruments Thermo Scientific To open an instrument offline click the instrument icon from the ChromQuest Main menu and then choose File gt Open Offline Or right click the instrument icon and choose Open Offline Using an instrument offline is exactly the same as using one of the Instrument windows online with respect to method development sequence development and reprocessing of data The Offline Processing window looks just like the Instrument window except the prompt Offline appears at the top of the win
219. mary QC Check Standard Unspiked Spiked Spike 1 of 2 Spike 2 of 2 Duplicate Begin Calibration End Calibration Baseline Check Baseline File DWOUOUUUOUUUDUDUDOUOUUU OU r Run Type Parameters No parameters necessary If there is a check mark adjacent to the Average Replicates prompt the replicates are averaged and the average is used in conjunction with the Calib Weight and Calib Flag to calculate a new calibration point You can quickly determine if a calibration run has an Average Replicates run type associated with it by looking at the sequence table Runs that are designated for Average Replicates have the code ARP in the Run Type column Figure 122 Sequence window E Sequence Calib seq hee i 1 Test01 1 TestO2 1 TestO3 2 TestO4 dltilevel calibration met multilevel calibration met multilevel calibration met multilevel calibration met gt gt Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup If you click the Run Type for one of these runs you see the Average Replicates box has been selected for the Run Type of that sample If desired click this check mark again to remove the Average Replicates from the Run Type for this sample Note When Automatic Averaging is turned off calibration replicates continue to be saved in the method until you clear or average them at the beginning of a calibration run Steps for Creating a Calibration
220. me in the instrument window or data recalled from the disk You can view multiple chromatograms in a single chromatogram window if you wish This is convenient if for example you want to compare a past run with your current data or overlay an oven or pump profile To add a new trace right click the chromatogram window The following shortcut menu appears Figure 16 Chromatogram shortcut menu Choose Add Trace When you select this command a dialog box appears Figure 17 New Trace Properties dialog box New Trace page New Trace Properties my x EXChomduestProjects Defaut DatalLabTest2 oS pve ChromQuest User Guide 19 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure 20 ChromQuest User Guide Select the New Trace tab Fill in the fields to add a trace to the chromatogram window and set its properties These properties apply only to the trace selected and are not saved as part of the method When a new trace is opened the properties are set to default values e Data source Enter the name of the file from which to get the trace You can also click File adjacent to the field and select a data source Current Data Use this to select a trace from the current chromatography data Current Method Use this to select a trace from your current method if available For example you could load an oven temperature program from a Trace GC instrument method Open Data Use this to sele
221. me of an acquisition channel specified by instrument configuration or the PDA multichromatogram definitions The entries cannot be edited Enable Noise Test Selecting this check box indicates that detector noise should be calculated on the corresponding channel If this check box is cleared the Threshold edit field to its right is disabled otherwise it is enabled Threshold Noise This is used to specify the maximum acceptable value for the calculated noise If the calculated noise is greater than the Threshold the baseline check is considered to have failed Enable Drift Test Selecting this check box indicates that detector drift should be calculated on the corresponding channel Threshold Drift hr This is used to specify the maximum acceptable value for the calculated drift If the calculated noise is greater than the Threshold the baseline check is considered to have failed Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Integrating the Chromatogram Integrating the Chromatogram ChromQuest comes with a default method that is adequate for data acquisition and analysis of simple chromatograms However your chromatography might require more elaborate treatment of the data or special integration of specific peaks Integration events are normally entered in the Integration Timed Events table This section describes how to optimize a method for proper integration of your data files Basics of Integratio
222. mmand or move the selection to another location in the spreadsheet by selecting the location and then choosing Paste Copy Use this command to make an exact copy of the selection on the clipboard Once you select Copy you can paste the selection to another application or copy the selection to a location in your spreadsheet ChromQuest User Guide 195 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics 196 ChromQuest User Guide Paste This command is used to paste the information currently on the clipboard into the spreadsheet at the location of the cursor Fill Down This enables you to automatically copy spreadsheet information from one field or row down through the rest of the spreadsheet Insert Paste This command works as a combination of the insert line and paste commands The item currently on the clipboard is pasted into a new line above where the cursor is located Insert Line This command inserts a blank line in the spreadsheet above where the cursor is located Clear Use this command to clear the information in the selected location You can also use the DELETE key from your keyboard for this function The F5 function key can be used to collapse rows that have been deleted from the spreadsheet Clear All Use this command to clear the information from the entire spreadsheet Select All Use this command to select the entire spreadsheet Open Method This command opens the method associated with the cu
223. mum sampling rate for your chromatography 80 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Frequency This selection is in Hz samples per second This is the selection for most chromatography applications Select from the list of frequencies available to configure your system Period When you select this type of sampling you must select the number of seconds or milliseconds between data points Enter the value and select whether the period is in milliseconds mSec or Seconds e Run Time Run time determines the length of time data is sampled e Acquisition Delay Acquisition delay is the interval between the start of run Trigger and the time when sampling starts for this channel Trigger Select the Trigger tab to select the type of trigger for the instrument Figure 84 Instrument Setup dialog box Trigger page E Instrument Setup Iof x TF Extemal Events u3 Detector 1 oe Trigger Type None z Manual External LJ None g starts Snediately after clicking on Start Sequence acquisitions do not paus Manual Operator has to press Enter to start the run Sequence acquisitions pause for confirma External If the data sampling is started from an external trigger select this option The type of tr when the instrument is configured Type Determines how the data sampling is started e None Sampling starts immediately after clicking Star
224. n To multiply two traces right click and choose Operations gt Multiply from the shortcut menu A prompt appears in the window Click on 1st trace Select the first trace by clicking the chromatogram A second prompt Click on 2nd trace appears Select the trace to be multiplied by the first by clicking the trace The result trace appears in the window 42 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Division Utilities Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure To divide two traces right click and choose Operations gt Divide from the shortcut menu A prompt appears in the window Click on Ist trace Select the first trace by clicking the chromatogram A second prompt Click on 2nd trace appears Select the trace to be divided into the first by clicking the trace The result trace appears in the window The equation used to calculate the result trace is as follows _ y1 p 2 2 y1 Y2 where Ymult p the calculated point for the result trace at time J a point from the first trace at time t yz a point from the second trace at time Ymult the y multiplier for the trace that converts it from microvolts to the trace s displayed units The Utilities menu gives you access to commands for saving copying or printing the current chromatogram window Right click and choose Utilities for these options Figure 46 Utilities menu Add Trace Add Multiple Traces Axis S
225. n Required Integration Events Two integration events are required for each run Width and Threshold These events are used to detect peak start stop and apex and to distinguish true peaks from noise The system uses default values of Width 0 2 minute and Threshold 50 For details on setting Width and Threshold as well as other integration timed events see Graphically Setting Width and Graphically Setting Threshold Sampling Rate The sampling rate used to acquire your data determines how much information the integration algorithm has for drawing and integrating the chromatogram The sampling frequency is set in the Instrument Setup part of your method To make sure you have the proper sampling rate use the Suggest Sampling Frequency command in graphical programming Slight over sampling of data is corrected with the Width integration parameter and is not a problem Try to avoid gross over sampling of data however as it does not give better integration and it wastes space on the hard drive of your computer More important however is not to under sample as there is no way to correct for data points that are not sufficient to define and integrate your peaks Graphical Integration Optimization Optimizing integration using Graphical Programming is easy to do With your chromatogram displayed in the chromatogram window right click anywhere in the window From the shortcut menu that appears choose Graphical Programming A list of avai
226. n 24 93 24 84 22 23 24 88 Std Dev 11 01 11 01 9 07 10 98 RSD 44 18 44 32 40 79 44 12 Using The Tutorial Files In this section of the Tutorial you will use the tutorial files provided to become familiar with additional features of the ChromQuest Chromatography Data System Reviewing Multi Level Calibration Curves Thermo Scientific Once you have fully calibrated a method the calibration curves and associated data can be viewed using the Review Calibration feature In order to see a fully calibrated multi level calibration use the multilevel calibration met file provided with ChromQuest To review calibration information in multilevel calibration 1 Open the multilevel calibration met method file by choosing File gt Method gt Open to display the Open Method File dialog box Select multilevel calibration met from your disk It is located in the Drive ChromQuest Methods directory Click Open Notice that the multilevel calibration met method is listed in the title bar of the Instrument window 2 Click the Review Calibration button in the command toolbar or choose Method gt Review Calibration ChromOQuest User Guide 67 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files 68 ChromQuest User Guide The following window appears Figure 70 Review Peak Calibration window E Review Peak Calibration Detector 1 Amont Aea RF LastArea 10 21742 5 Level rae aa 393158 19657 9 Ss xia La 593403 19
227. n compressed format it is automatically decompressed whenever the file is opened However once a file is saved in compressed format you must do a Save as command to save it in decompressed format again Print Instrument Configuration This causes the current instrument configuration to be printed on the default printer Recent Method Files When you choose Files gt Recent Method Files the most recently used method files appear in this list You can change the number of recent files listed or turn this feature off completely using the View gt Preferences gt Files tab Recent Data Files When you choose Files gt Recent Data Files the most recently used data files appear in this list You can change the number of recent files listed or turn this feature off completely using the View gt Preferences gt Files tab Recent Sequence Files When you choose Files gt Recent Sequence Files the most recently used sequence files appear in this list You can change the number of recent files listed or turn this feature off completely using the View gt Preferences gt Files tab 12 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Selecting a New Project Thermo Scientific When the logon and project management is turned on you must select a project when you log on to an instrument This project becomes the current project for your instrument You can change the projec
228. n Method Calibration This tab enables you to set calibration defaults Figure 91 Method Properties dialog box Calibration page Method Properties M e Automatically average consecutive replicates of the same level When this check box is selected calibration replicates multiple injections of a single calibration level are always averaged If this check box is cleared calibration replicates are not averaged unless you so specify at the time of calibration e Number of replicates in rolling average If you wish to use a rolling average type the number of replicates per average here e Response factor definition Select how the response factors are to be calculated and displayed Area Amount or Amount Area 88 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Audit Trail Reasons When you have selected the Audit Trail Option for your method with reasons ChromQuest prompts you for the reason for changes to the method at the time of the change or when the method is saved Figure 92 Method Audit Trail dialog box jj Method Audit Trail Ignore peaks at beginning of run which are not of interest If you have selected the option to enter a reason at every change the dialog box appears each time you make a change to the method A description of the change appears in the Source Activity box Type the reason for the change in the Reason box and then click
229. n appearance scheme on disk you can select it from this box The Save As button allows you to save the existing appearance scheme on disk by giving it a name The Delete button allows you to delete the scheme and start again Item This list lets you select the part of the chromatogram window that you wish to change the appearance of The choices include the graph itself including background axis setups and legends and the available traces Sub item Select the sub item you wish to modify The choices for this change based on the item you have selected For example if the item selected is the Graph you have access to sub items that include the background axes and labels for the graph If the item selected is a chromatogram data channel you have access to sub items such as baselines start and stop tic marks and annotation When a sub item is selected you have access to fields appropriate to that item For example if you chose the baseline sub item you can choose the color and line type If you chose the annotation sub item you can choose the font appearance and color For details on items and sub items see Chapter 1 Basics of Operation Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports To go back to the Trace Setup or Annotation tab click the desired tab When you have completed the settings on each page click OK to add the selected traces to the current trace window on your report If you wish to m
230. n designate items for your report Figure 224 Run Report dialog box Run Report M Integration Codes Current RF Average RF _ Relative RT Retention Time Theoretical plates USP pK Cancel _ Data source Select the Data Source current data or stored data file and the Channel from which you want to display information Report Use the check boxes to select what peaks you want to report Named peaks Select All if you want to report all calibrated peaks whether detected or not Select Detected Only if you want to report only the calibrated peaks detected in the sample Unnamed peaks Select this check box if you want to include uncalibrated peaks in your report Groups Select this check box if you want to include defined groups in your report Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Totals Select this check box if you want to include totals for numeric columns in your report e Available parameters A list of the possible parameters to report is displayed in this box To add one of the parameters to your report double click it or click it once and click the Green arrow button to move it to the Report the following parameters box You may select one or more of the parameters at a time by holding down either the SHIFT key to select contiguous parameters or the CTRL key to select non contiguous parameters e Decimals For
231. n select more than one item to be displayed for example multiple channels of data or a chromatogram with stored pump or oven profile Each trace appears as one row in the Trace Setup spreadsheet Use the Show and Legend check boxes to turn on or off display of the trace itself or the legend Figure 207 Data Graph Properties dialog box Trace Setup page Data Graph Properties l aa a a s Current Data maj 4 Projects Default D ata amino 1 a dat e Channel A FL eC 4 Click the Axis Setup tab Use this tab to designate a graph title and general options for all traces to be displayed Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 239 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Figure 208 Data Graph Properties dialog box Axis Setup page Data Graph Properties Chromatography Data Show legen d Include sample ID in legend T Include data file name in lege FI chaw ori e Graph title Type a title if desired for the graph This appears at the top of the trace region on the report e Axis information From the drop down list select the axis to configure You can select Left Y Axis Right Y Axis or X Axis For Y Axis setup you select a trace to use for the limits If more than one trace is listed in the Trace Setup tab you can select one of the traces to automatically use the Y Axis limits from that trace for the graph For X Axis you can choose to Autoscale the entire trace shown or you can use a speci
232. n type to be used In most cases this involves selecting a template to be used for a report Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet e Setting run types for multiple runs You can quickly change the run type for multiple runs highlight the desired rows in the spreadsheet and then right click and select Set Run Types from the options menu When you select the desired run type from the options list it is applied to the rows you have selected Figure 183 Sample Run Type options menu Cut Copy Paste Fill Down Insert Paste Insert Line Clear Clear All Select All Open Method Open Data Process Sequence Run Sequence Insert New Sequence Set Run Types Car All Calibration P ti Clear Calbration at Level de sic Piint Calibration Report Average Replicates Char Replicates System Suitability Summary QC Check Standard Level For a calibration run you must enter the level number for the calibration standard For example if you have five calibration concentration levels each calibration run will have a level number representing the calibration concentration level being run This number is NOT the concentration amount of the standards however Concentration amounts are entered in the peak table Sample ID Enter a sample identification here This can be text and numeric information If you entered a Sample ID in the new sequence dialo
233. nalyzes peaks defined in the group as a single peak A common response factor is calculated for the group based on one or more calibration runs where concentration levels are defined for the group In addition you can choose to include calibrated named peaks in the group The following example does not show peaks calibrated individually instead peaks have been combined together in certain regions of the chromatogram and calibrated in groups creating a unique response factor for each group Follow the steps to set up the groups Figure 138 Group calibration Volts Time 43 9729 Minutes Amplitude 0 009208 Volts annel 4 Urtitled To define a group of peaks graphically using the stored chromatogram If you do not currently have the data file open click the Open Files button Open the data file that contains the peaks you wish to include in your group Click the Analyze button Make sure all the peaks you wish to include in the group are detected Click the Define Group button or right click and choose Graphical Programming gt Define Group from the shortcut menu With this function you define one or more group windows using the mouse All detected peaks within the group windows become part of the group being defined You can then create a group that contains non contiguous peaks in the chromatogram Click the mouse once to the left of the first peak to be included in the group This defines the beginnin
234. nce scheme on disk you can select it from this list You can use the Save As button to save the existing appearance scheme on disk by giving it a name The Delete button allows you to delete a scheme and start again e Item Select from this list the part of the chromatogram window whose appearance you wish to change The choices include the graph itself including background and legends and the available traces 24 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Sub item Select the sub item that you wish to modify The choices for this change based on the item you have selected For example if the item selected is the Graph you have access to setting up appearances of sub items including the background axes and labels for the graph If the item selected is a chromatogram data channel you have access to setting appearances of sub items such as baselines start and stop tic marks and annotation If the item selected is text you have access to the Font formatting commands as well When a sub item is selected you have access to fields appropriate for that item For example if you chose the baseline sub item you can choose the color and line type If you chose the annotation sub item you can choose the font appearance and color Figure 22 Chromatogram window with multiple traces Channel A OF x Time 3 56795 Minutes Amplitude 0 030823 Volts Channel
235. nclude method contents report When you select this option a method contents report is automatically generated whenever the method changes in a sequence When this option is enabled the sequence automatically adds a Print Additional Reports run type to each run where the method has changed from the previous run in the sequence This can be changed or deleted for any given run in the Edit Sequence spreadsheet When you have completed the options on this page click Finish A sequence is created using the information specified on all the pages and displayed as a spreadsheet Figure 171 Sequence with repetitions as separate records E Sequence Test4 seq Of x ima stews f funte f keve fps L Sampei menot Erans f 1 1 001amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_001amino_2 met Rep1 dat i CAL SMR 1 1 001 amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_001 amino_2 met Rep2 dat CAL SMR E 1 002amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_002amino_2 met Rep1 dat CAL SMR 2 1 002amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_002amino_2 met Rep2 dat CAL SMR 3 1 003amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_003amino_2 met Rep1 dat CAL SMR 3 1 003amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_003amino_2 met Rep2 dat Summary Run 0 1 001 amino_2 met amino_2 met 001 amino_2 met Rep1 dat Summary Run 0 1 001 amino_2 met amino_2 met 001 amino_2 met Rep2 dat Summary Run 0 1 002amino_2 met amino_2 met O02amino_2 met Rep1 dat Summary Run 0 1 002amino_2 met ami
236. ng Selections include Dual Front and Rear Processing mode Select a mode for running the sequence Normal downloads the sequence one vial at a time It is the correct setting for all HPLC runs and can be used with some GC runs High Throughput performs two injections per vial for those GCs that support this mode of operation Full Download downloads the entire sequence at the start of the sequence This is the correct mode of line for systems that contain an HS2000 or an HS 850 Bracketing Select the type of bracketing you wish to perform See Bracketed Calibrations on page 217 for details e None Select this if you do not wish to bracket calibrations e Standard Select this if you wish to perform the standard mode of bracketing calibrations e Std w Clear Calib Select this if you wish to perform the standard mode of bracketing calibrations clearing the calibration before the start of each calibration set e Sequence Select this if you want to perform the sequence mode of bracketing calibrations e Seq w Back Calc Select this if you want to perform the sequence mode of bracketing calibrations and back calculate calibration runs e Review Results review pause after each run Select this option if you want the sequence to pause between runs for you to review results Calibration review pause after each calibration set Select this option if you want the sequence to pause after each calibration set where a
237. ng the Stop button in the toolbar do not release the mouse button until the Stop icon changes to the depressed appearance Figure 109 Stop Run dialog box Stop current run only 3 Stop current run and sequence run Stop all run queue items you submitted Stop all run queue items x eee e e Stop current run only Select this to end the run currently in progress If the run is a part of a currently queued sequence the sequence continues with the next run e Stop current run and sequence run This selection stops the run currently in progress and terminates the sequence it is a part of Other queued items proceed Stop all run queue items you submitted This selection stops the run currently in progress and terminates all the items in the queue that were submitted by you Queue items submitted by other users are unaffected 104 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Single Run Acquisition e Stop all run queue items This selection stops the run currently in progress and terminates all items in the run queue Note When a run is stopped the data up to that point is saved in the data file However no analysis of the data is performed If you want to produce a report or view results from a run that was stopped you must analyze the data file Baseline Check On Demand To perform an on demand baseline check choose Control gt Baseline Check A dialog box appears wh
238. nical Publications Editor at techpubs lcms thermofisher com ChromQuest User Guide xi Basics of Operation This chapter describes the basic operation of the ChromQuest 5 0 chromatography data system its file structure the features of the application windows and the features of the chromatogram windows Contents e Main Menu Window e Instrument Wizard e Program Architecture and Data Structure Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 1 1 Basics of Operation Main Menu Window 2 Main Menu Window ChromQuest User Guide To open the main window of ChromQuest from the taskbar choose Start gt All Programs gt Chromatography gt ChromQuest or click the desktop shortcut icon Perform system administration and instrument configuration from this window For information on administrating the ChromQuest chromatography data system refer to the ChromQuest Administrator Guide For information on configuring your Thermo LC SpectraSYSTEM LC see the ChromQuest User Guide for the SpectraSYSTEM LC For information on configuring your Surveyor Plus LC see the ChromQuest User Guide for the Surveyor LC Figure 1 ChromQuest 5 0 main window ioi xi File Edit Yiew Tools Help Q eea x slae Current location group is The Enterprise The Enterprise Surveyor Plus Thermo GC Thermo LC Lawoystem i System System Ready User B 4 Cook S 5 ADMIN INST ADMIN 7 Thermo Scientific 1 Basic
239. ning existing data files for the purpose of reprocessing only To create a reprocessing sequence choose File gt Sequence gt New Figure 173 Sequence Wizard Method page Sequence Wizard Method nterprise Projects Defaut Methods amino_2 met ade AmiGunt values Semple amounts nteTal stangarg amGurat l MoltipicatGn Tractor gt g S Back Fist For Data File Type select the From existing data files option This bypasses the wizard pages necessary for creating an acquisition sequence and allows you to select data files to be reprocessed In addition amount values from the data files selected are entered into the sequence Click Next to continue ChromQuest User Guide 191 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Reprocessing Sequence Sequence Wizard Select Files Files that are currently selected for inclusion in the reprocessing sequence are displayed Figure 174 Sequence Wizard Select Files page Sequence Wizard Select Files D enterprise Projects D efault D ata 4mino03 dat D enterprise Projects D efault D ata A4mino04 dat If no data files are selected click the File open button to select the data files 192 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Reprocessing Sequence Sequence Wizard Open data file This page is almost identical to the standard Open Data File dialog box but the bottom displays a list of data files that are selected to
240. no_2 met O02amino_2 met Rep2 dat Summary Run 0 1 003amino_2 met amino_2 met O03amino_2 met Rep1 dat Summary Run 0 1 003amino_2 met amino_2 met O03amino_2 met Rep2 dat Summary Run 0 1 004amino_2 met amino_2 met O04amino_2 met Rep1 dat Summary Run 0 1 004amino_2 met amino_2 met 004amino_2 met Rep2 dat CAL SMR 1 1 004amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_004amino_2 met Rep1 dat CAL SMR 1 1 004amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_004amino_2 met Rep2 dat CAL SMR 2 1 005amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_005amino_2 met Rep1 dat CAL SMR 2 1 005amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_005amino_2 met Rep2 dat CAL SMR 3 1 006amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_006amino_2 met Rep1 dat Al SMB a finfaminn 2met amino 2 metl Cal ifamino 2 met Ren datl X ChromOQuest User Guide 189 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard 190 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 172 Sequence with repetitions combined i Sequence reps seq olx amaj ste Su tape f iesi Reps Sampel Method ooo erame S 001 amino_2 met amino_2 met i Cal_001 amino_2 met dat Calibration O02amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_002amino_2 met d Calibration OO3amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_003amino_2 met d Unknown O01 amino_2 met amino_2 met 001 amino_2 met d Unknown O02amino_2 met amino_2 met O02amino_2 met d Unknown O03amino_2 met amino_2 met O03amino_2 met d Calibration O04amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_004amino_2 met
241. not in 32 bit ChromQuest data format such as converted files In order to comply with good laboratory practices you cannot Save As 32 bit using the same name as an existing data file unless the file is located in a Public directory A Public directory is a directory where the path contains the term public Data files in all other ChromQuest directories are protected from being overwritten Figure 9 Save data file as dialog box Save data file as 2 xi Save in ja Data 2 Amino01 dat 3 Amino03a dat 2 Amino22a da 3 amino01a dat 3 mino04 dat 2 Amino33 dat A 3 AminoO2 dat 3 AminoO5 dat 3 Amino33a da 3 AminoO2a dat E amino11 dat 3 Amino44 dat Help 2 Amino02b dat 3 amino11a dat a Amino44a da 3 AminoO3 dat 2 Amino22 dat 2 Amino55 dat 4 2 File name jl Save as type Data files dat x I Compress Data r Description To save the current data in a new data file type the name of the new data file in the File name field and click Save Use the buttons at the upper right of the dialog box to view details of a highlighted file or to view the description of a highlighted file An entry Saved from FILENAME will be logged into the saved file as the first entry ChromQuest User Guide 11 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure If the Compress Data box is selected the file is saved in a compressed format Once saved i
242. ns move the items you want to export into the box on the right side of the screen by first clicking the item to highlight it and then click the Green arrow button to move it to the right To move several items you can click and drag over the items to highlight them and then click the Green arrow button You can select multiple items by clicking the mouse on them one at a time while holding down the CTRL key To remove an item from the list select the item or items in the right box and click the Red arrow button to remove it from the export list If the item is numeric you can designate the number of decimal places to be displayed e Export options Select a Field separator from the list This designates what separates each piece of information to be exported Enter a Path for export files or select one from the available paths by clicking the File button Export files that you create are stored in this folder directory on your disk e Enable ODBC Select this check box if you want to utilize Open DataBase Connectivity for data export When this option is selected you must then select or enter the name of your data source or path name for the location of your database Also enter a name for the data table If the table does not currently exist in your database a new table is created The export parameters selected become the field names in the table If you are exporting to an existing table the export parameters must all exist
243. nsert a configuration report for the instrument into your report Method Audit Trail Use this option to create or update the template for viewing and printing the Method Audit Trail LogViewMethodAuditReport lrp If you insert this into a custom report no method audit trail is printed The only way to print a method audit trail is by choosing File gt Method gt Audit Trail to open the Method Audit Trail window Then right click the Method Audit Trail window and choose Print all Method Report Use this option to insert a report containing method details into your report Pretreatment Audit Trail Use this option to insert the audit trail for the autosampler pretreatment file into your report Run Report Use this option to insert a table containing chromatography results into your report Spectrum Report Use this option to insert the spectrum report into your custom report Thermo Scientific Method Reports Thermo Scientific To add details about the current method to your report right click the method custom report and choose Insert Report gt Method Report from the shortcut menu A dialog box appears 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports where you select the items from the method you wish to include in your report Figure 215 Method Report dialog box Method Report x Trace Fliers Options Description Audit Trail Integration Events Peak Table Group Table External Events System Suitability PDA
244. nstallation Guide ChromQuest 5 0 Administrator Guide e ChromQuest 5 0 Reference Guide ChromQuest 5 0 Quick Reference Safety and Special Notices Make sure you follow the precautionary statements presented in this guide The safety and other special notices appear in boxes Safety and special notices include the following IMPORTANT Highlights information necessary to prevent damage to software loss of data or invalid test results or might contain information that is critical for optimal performance of the system x ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Preface Note Highlights information of general interest Tip Highlights helpful information that can make a task easier Contacting Us There are several ways to contact Thermo Fisher Scientific for the information you need K2 kod Thermo Scientific To contact Technical Support Phone 800 685 9535 Fax 561 688 8736 E mail TechSupport C MS thermofisher com Knowledge base www thermokb com Find software updates and utilities to download at www mssupport thermo com To contact Customer Service for ordering information Phone 800 532 4752 Fax 561 688 8731 Web site www thermo com ms To copy manuals from the Internet Go to mssupport thermo com and click Customer Manuals in the left margin of the window To suggest changes to documentation or to Help e Fill out a reader survey online at www thermo com Icms techpubs e Send an e mail message to the Tech
245. nt of an internal standard The internal standard must be entered in your Peak table and must have a calibration amount assigned to it Enter the Peak ID number of the internal standard from your Peak table in this field Reference ID If you are using a reference peak enter its Peak ID number from the Peak table for the peak to be used as a reference peak The retention time of the reference peak will be used to adjust the start and end times of the group windows Note that the reference peak must be identified in the Peak table and given an expected retention time The reference peak does not need to have calibration levels assigned to it ChromQuest User Guide 151 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration 152 ChromQuest User Guide e Units Enter the units to be used for reporting group concentration results Include named peaks Select this check box if you want to include any individually calibrated peaks named peaks in this calibrated group The areas of the named peaks are used in calculation of the group response factor Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks in group Selecting the Calculate concentration for unnamed peaks in group check box causes the concentrations of the unnamed uncalibrated peaks in the group to be calculated using the group response factor and listed in the peak report The peak report includes the unnamed peak concentrations but does not report the group concentration as a peak The
246. o Ww co Data Multical i 001 Compound Dup2 Cone In order for your sequence report to contain valid duplicate report information when it is printed you must make sure your method and sequence are set up to create a sequence duplicate report In the Peak table of the method the relative difference limit for the calculated concentrations between duplicate samples is entered as the Dup RD value In the Sequence select Duplicate in the Run Type column for the samples of interest For each duplicate you must also designate the Duplicate Level for that sample For example Duplicate 1 and Duplicate 2 After Duplicate samples are analyzed the QC Duplicate Report is printed showing the calculated concentrations of the two samples the mean value of the concentrations calculated relative difference between the two the relative difference limits entered in the Peak Table and the Pass Fail status of the results 272 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Creating QC Reports The following is an example of a QC Duplicate report Figure 249 QC duplicate report Type File Sample ID Acquired Dup1 C ChromQuest data multi calibration Multilevel Calibration Levell 11 26 90 8 48 53 PM level1 dat Dup 2 C ChromQuest dalat multi calibration Multilevel CalibrationLevel2 11 26 90 3 49 09 PM level2 dat Channel A Compound Dup Conc Dup 2 Conc Mean Conc ARD Actual Dup RD Status Limit P
247. o find the right one 84 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Figure 87 Method Properties dialog box Description page Method Properties OA Method for PNAJ Options Click the Options tab Figure 88 Method Properties dialog box Options page Method Properties Fal EJEN l Minutes e Analyze during acquisition If you select this check box the chromatogram is automatically analyzed during the run at the interval you specify in the corresponding box Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 85 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method e Analyze after acquisition If this check box is selected the chromatogram is analyzed automatically after every acquisition This is the ChromQuest default condition If this box is cleared you must either manually analyze the chromatogram by clicking Analyze or analyze the sample as part of a sequence reprocessing after the run has been completed e Enable compression for data file When this check box is selected the data files acquired using the data system is automatically compressed before saving Compressed data files are smaller but take longer to load Once a file has been saved using compression the only way to decompress it is to save it as another data file with compression turned off Audit Trail Click the Audit Trail tab The Enable Audit Trail check box is an important box because if selecte
248. od Report Pretreatment Audit Trail Pretreatment Report Purity Report Run Report Sequence Audit Trail Spectrum Report e Calibration Info Use this option to insert a table containing details of your calibration e Calibration Table Use this option to insert a table containing the peak calibration details into your report e Data Audit Trail Use this option to insert the data file audit trail table into your report e Electronic Signatures Table Use this option to insert the electronic signatures table into the report e Generic Report Use this option to insert a report table file that was created by a user program A dialog box requests you to enter the file name for the generic report file You can also select the file by clicking the Open button Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 245 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports 246 ChromQuest User Guide Figure 214 Generic Report dialog box Filename N Cancel Help For details on the required format for generic reports contact Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Activity Log Use this option to create or update the template for viewing and printing Instrument Activity logs LogViewInstActReport lrp If you insert this into a custom report no activity log is printed The only way to print an Instrument Activity log is by choosing File gt Instrument Activity Log gt Print All from the menu bar Instrument Configuration Report Use this option to i
249. odify any of these items again right click anywhere in the trace box and select the desired area from the menu shown Figure 211 Trace options menu Add Trace Add Multiple Traces Axis Setup Annotations Appearance Full Unzoom Clear Overlays Operations Utilities Properties e Zooming the Chromatogram Once you have inserted a chromatogram onto your report you can adjust the view by clicking it to activate it then zooming in the same manner as you can in the chromatogram window To go back to the previous zoom level double click the chromatogram region on the report e Scrolling the Chromatogram Once you have zoomed in on a chromatogram you can scroll the chromatogram to the right or left without losing the zoom Press the CTRL SHIFT keys move the mouse until the cursor changes to a hand and drag it to the left or right You can also scroll the X or Y axis to view features that may be out of the range To do this press the CTRL SHIFT keys while the mouse cursor is outside the graph area yet near the axis of interest The cursor changes to an up down arrow near the Y axis or a left right arrow near the X axis Moving the mouse in this mode scrolls the graph up down or left right on the axis To restore the original view right click the chromatogram window and choose Full Unzoom Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 243 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Figure 212 M
250. on peak in the chromatogram and then once to the right of the last calibration peak in the chromatogram A dialog box appears where you set up some of the parameters for the peaks that will be added to the peak table Figure 125 Define Peaks dialog box Define Peaks MINUTES e Define peaks in range All peaks detected within the range between the Start Time and Stop Time shown are added to your peak table This range was defined by your mouse clicks on the chromatogram You may change these times manually in the boxes shown if you desire Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup e Retention time window The Retention time window value sets a window around the expected retention time of calibrated peaks A retention time window is important because it allows a peak to drift slightly within the window and still be identified as a calibrated peak If no retention time window is set a calibrated peak must ALWAYS occur at exactly the expected retention time in order to be identified as the calibrated component You can select a Relative retention time window or an Absolute retention time window The relative retention time window is based on a percent of the expected retention time of the component By default the relative retention time window is set to 5 which means that the retention time window for calibrated peaks is set to 5 of their expected retention time Later eluting peaks have larger time
251. ons per run Enter the number of times each unknown will be repeated or re injected Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard e Create a separate row in the sequence for each unknown repetition Select this option if you wish to create a separate row in the sequence for each unknown repetition If you do not select this option unknown repetitions are not displayed in the sequence spreadsheet although individual data files are created and stored for each repetition acquired When you have selected the options on this page click Next to continue Sequence Wizard Autosampler If you have an autosampler control option this screen of the sequence wizard appears It is used to set up the vial numbers for the first unknown and calibration of the sequence A default injection volume can also be entered This can be changed on a per run basis in the sequence spreadsheet Figure 166 Sequence Wizard Autosampler page Sequence Wizard Autosampler Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 185 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard Sequence Wizard Calibration Use this page to set up calibration standards in your sequence Figure 167 Sequence Wizard Calibration page Sequence Wizard Calibration e Calibration ID Enter a calibration sample identification This is a text value that is stored in the calibration data file The identifie
252. or additional details see Process Sequence on page 199 Data Acquisition without Processing If you wish to acquire and store data on the hard disk but postpone processing completely until you have reviewed the data turn the option to analyze after acquisition off before you acquire the data This is done in the Method gt Properties section See Method Properties on page 84 Figure 193 Method Properties dialog box Options tab Method Properties x Description Options Audit Trail 0 Mimutes V Analyze after acquisition V Automatically average replicates J Enable compression for data file Response factor definition Area Amount Amount Area Cancel Help If the check box for Analyze after acquisition is selected data files generated with this method are integrated and results are generated automatically after each acquisition If you clear this option in your method no analysis occurs as you acquire runs with this method The data is saved on the disk but no results are generated Note The option to turn off analysis after acquisition is part of the method If you want to postpone processing of a sequence until after data acquisition is completed make sure all methods specified in your sequence have this option turned off Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 219 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Summary Reports Sequence Summary Reports You can automatically generate
253. orts 0 000000 e eee eee 223 Saving a Seqnence Filesi ches ra ok he eae aie Dhl Rees ete Aah 223 Chapter5 Custom Reports 0ccc cece cece e eee eee e eee eee eee eeee 225 Anatomy of a Custom Reports s2 ass ek eee ee eee 226 Method Custom Reports castes eiale beara araelanbatiana bone enner nrn 227 Short Cuts for Custom Repottsia cits ion wita inliota nee bea mio bes 228 Sequence Custom Reports 0 0 ec eee eee e nn 229 General Text Information nih spscstis prsa p ene poe eed ieee g 230 Pleadersatid Foot rs seess dis pw sete Gata an Sn on ed aes Rescate 233 Cut Copy and Paste Report Items atone tacos Later et as 233 Adding Fields to a Report 454 vats ee wate exis ee 233 Adding a Chromatogram to the Report 00 heciec a cassie bale wlacate ands 236 Inseft Reportere 4 co anes ute wie wie Re ree el ane la Me hil othe Ande al sy de 245 Method Reports soca d2 05 ties 0 aesisatso aeitisaihe tele a 4 ee a A 247 Cali biathlon REPOtts ih oa cteiinkas Late naw dae NERSE E KERR Ros 248 Rum Reports ss s5 0i04 s00 miat Porin eile Fenni pe Sa SS Had Geet aes 253 Placing a Graph Next to a Report s wae acres terdoa went elma 258 Inserting an Instrument Activity Report 0 0 0 e eee eee 259 Inserting an Instrument Configuration Report 00 000000 259 Inserting a Method Audit Trail Report 2 025 424 se cued tes wae die NG 259 Electronic Signatures in Custom Reports 00000 cess ee eee 260 SEQUENCE
254. ote For details on advanced reporting functions see the Guide to Advanced Templates doc file located in the Manual folder of the program CD Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 275 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Creating a new report template To create a new advanced report template choose File gt Advanced Reports gt New A blank spreadsheet template appears The report template is created by inserting data series formulas and text into the cells of the spreadsheet You can also define a header and footer insert charts of data and format the cells as described in the following sections Figure 253 Template Editor window S 2S fT Aria joz B 7 u Sok eM B c D G H Insert Text To insert text on the template simply click the cell where you want the text to appear and type the text You can format the text using the buttons on the toolbar for features including font bold italic underline and justify You can also change the color of the text 276 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Format Cell Style Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting There is a wide variety of ways to automatically format the style of the selected cell or cells Click the Cell Style button and a dialog box opens where you can select the appropriate style for the currently selected cells Figure 254 Cell Style dialog box Cell Style xi Category Decimal places General Text
255. ou will use a method provided with ChromQuest to examine a Peak Table and become familiar with what a completed peak table looks like To explore a Peak Table 1 Open the multilevel calibration met method which is located in the Drive ChromQuest Methods directory by choosing File gt Method gt Open to display the Open Method File dialog box Then select multilevel calibration met from the list of methods on your disk ie 2 After the multilevel calibration met method is open view its Peak Table by clicking the Peak Table button on the toolbar The following peak table appears Figure 71 Peak Table o x Named Peaks Groups iD Ret Time Window Ref ID ISTD ID Units RT Update Quantitate FitType k 5 500 1 5 5 0 275 None Point to Poini Peak 6 733 2 6 73333 0 336667 None Point to Point Peak 8 533 3 8 53333 0 426667 None Point to Point Peak 9 083 9 08333 0 454167 None Point to Point On the Named Peaks tab you find a table containing all of the calibration information for the calibrated peaks in this method If you scroll to the right you see many different columns each of which represent a parameter for the calibration including the Levels which contain the calibration amounts for each compound at each level of calibration 3 To customize the Peak Table such that only parameters needed for a given calibration are displayed
256. our desired range If you choose None no Y Axis values are displayed For the X Axis you can either choose to Autoscale where the X Axis is set to the longest trace Or you can set an absolute range for the X Axis by clicking Use This Range and then enter a minimum and maximum X Axis value for the trace Click Get Limits to retrieve the X Axis range from the current trace e Margins Enter a value for the trace margins in percent for the top and bottom of the graph e General Options Select the check boxes to turn these graph annotations on and off If the legend check box is selected the legend for a trace can be turned on or off from the Trace Properties spreadsheet Figure 24 Chromatogram window with legend and grid displayed E Channel A Iof x Channel A Untitied Pica ener eae Figure 25 Chromatogram window with no legend or grid displayed E Channel A Iof x e Orientation Select the Portrait or Landscape option for your graph orientation 28 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Data Graph Properties The Data Graph Properties pages are used to set the properties of the chromatograms or traces in the chromatogram window The tabs available are Trace Setup Axis Setup and Appearance Use these tabs to change chromatogram colors annotations and appearance and to set specific chromatogram time voltage ranges to be
257. over cells to appear and then click the Cover Cells button The highlighted area appears as a single cell where text or charts can be added An example is given below Figure 272 Drag mouse to highlight cells SB 2S fT aval qio z e 7 u E 2 al Rak wlA A B E eel Figure 273 Click Cover Cells button and change color if desired a a 2S fT Aria joz s z u E 2 R Aa ala aS e TE 296 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Figure 274 Enter text or chart Text in Cover Cell Once cover cells have been defined clicking the Cover Cells button inside the defined cover cells range undoes the cover cells You can resize the cover cells by dragging the size of the cover cells box and then clicking the Cover Cells button again This will only resize the cover cells box if the size of the new area is both wider and longer than the existing cover cell See the example below Figure 275 Cover Cells defined 8 2 amp f aia Jo z B z u E a kok BlA a B E ae ae Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 297 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Figure 276 Drag to new cover cell size longer and wider E Template Editor olx Figure 277 Click Cover Cells button to create new cover cell j Sak p Aa 2 Figure 278 Dragging cover cell definition longer or wider only has no effect E Template Editor olx
258. p table click the Peak Group Tables button in the toolbar Click the Groups tab to view the group information table Figure 140 Peak Group Tables window E Peak Group Tables Detector A ioj x Named Peaks Groups E __Nane _ Ref LEN ISTD ID A Lis Chlorinated Com 0 Calibrated ue The Group Type should indicate Calibrated Range If you click the Group Def field you see the retention time range for the regions you selected using the mouse to define the group In order to calibrate the groups you must enter calibration amounts for each group In the columns of the group table labeled Level 1 and so on enter the calibration amount to be used to calculate the calibration curve for that group Also enter the concentration units for reporting group results in the column labeled Units In order to properly do group calibration you must designate the following parameters for each group to be calibrated e Fit Type This option determines whether the calibration plot is to be based on a point to point linear quadratic cubic or Average RF fit to the data Note You have five choices for how the calibration curves are drawn point to point linear quadratic cubic and Average RF fits You must have at least two points for a linear fit not including zero three points for a quadratic and four points for a cubic fit e Force Zero When this check box is selected the calibration curve is forced through zero
259. p2 dat 1 003amino_2 met_ amino 2met __O03amino_2 met Rep1 dat E E A ec Summayaun 1f004amino 2met amino 2met _O04amino_2 met Rep1 dat SummayRun 1 004amino 2 met _ amino 2met _ OO4amino_2 met Fiep2 dat o Summary Run Summary Run m CALSMR 1 1 004amino_2 met amino_2 met Cal_004amino_2 met Rep dat CAL SMR 1004amino 2met amino 2met Cal 004amino_2 met Rep2 dat CAL SMR 2 1 005amino 2met amino 2met _ Cal 005amino_2 met Rep1 dat casman 1 005amino 2met amino 2met _ Cal 005amino_2 met Rep2 dat casman 3 1 006amino 2met amino 2met _ Cal 006amino_2 met Rep1 dat Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics Each row is assigned a run number followed by columns for information for each run in the sequence Rows and field information can be cut copied pasted and cleared To access the menu for these commands right click anywhere within the spreadsheet Figure 178 Sequence spreadsheet options menu window E Sequence Test4 seq OF x I Front Back CAL SMB CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR Summary Run Summary Run Summary Run Summary Run Summary Run Summary Run Summary Run Summary Run CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR CAL SMR Summary Run amino_2 met D1 amino_2 me amino_2 metD2amino_2 me amino_2 metO02amino_2 me Fill Down amino_2 met03amino_2 me sean
260. peak groups are supported For Calibrated range groups if you have defined your group to calculate concentrations for unnamed peaks you can include these in your group reporting by selecting the appropriate opton e Trace index Select the trace number if multi channel files where the first trace 1 second trace 2 and so on When you are done with this page click Finish The function defined by your answers to the Function Wizard are inserted in the currently selected cell Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 289 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Table Wizard The Table Wizard is used to create tables of information in your report Use this to create a sequence summary report Click the Table Wizard button to start the wizard Table Wizard Table Type Select the type of table from those available This may be expanded in the future to support other types of tables Figure 264 Table Wizard Table Type page Table Wizard Table Type Sequence Summary able Back iSt 290 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Table Wizard Parameters Use this page to select the parameters you want to include in your table The selections change depending on whether you choose Peaks or Groups Figure 265 Table Wizard Parameters page Table Wizard Parameters A Area ESTD Concentration Name Retention Time ISTD Concentration NORM Concentration Relative R
261. peak table you can renumber the new peak table automatically by right clicking the peak table and choosing Renumber Peak ID from the shortcut menu Note If you renumber the Peak ID make sure any custom parameter programs or other user programs that might use the Peak ID are updated to reflect the new Peak ID s e Ret Time This is the calibrated peak s expected retention time If you have used graphical events to enter the peaks into the peak table Retention Times are automatically filled in using the retention times of the detected peaks in the standard file used to create the table Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup e Window The width of the window is indicated and is centered on the retention time value If a peak s retention time adjusted for reference peak shift falls outside this window it is not identified as the calibrated peak If more than one peak falls within the window the peak closest to the center of the window is identified as the calibrated component You can change the size of the window by entering a new value in minutes Resolution ID Enter a peak ID to be used for calculation of resolution if desired If this is left blank the resolution is calculated for the peak of interest based on the detected peak preceding it If the peak entered here is not detected or if a peak refers to itself for the Resolution ID the resolution is not calculated Ref ID
262. pen an existing report template by choosing File gt Report Template gt Open or by clicking the Open button in the toolbar and then Open Report Template When you select a report template from the disk it overwrites your existing custom report Short Cuts for Custom Reports ChromQuest User Guide There are a number of shortcuts to customize the appearance of the information in your custom report These include items such as setting various types of margins forcing page breaks and quick editing e Quick Undo If you want to reverse or undo an action you just performed press CTRL Z The action such as insert a field most recently performed is reversed This is the same as doing a right mouse click followed by Edit gt Undo e Select all Press CTRL A to select the entire custom report e Quick copy cut paste Press CTRL C to copy the selected item Press CTRL V to paste the item Press CTRL X to cut a selected item e Forcing a Page Break When you want to force a certain element of your report to always print at the top of a new page insert a page break before that item To insert a page break on your custom report position your cursor at the point where you want the new page to begin and then press CTRL ENTER on your keyboard This sequence forces whatever follows in the report to be printed on a new page of paper when the report is printed A page break is indicated on the custom report template by a
263. petitions specified for this row of the sequence is generated QC Check Std Check standard sample A check standard inserted in a sequence is used for generation of a Check Standard Report It is a means for checking the chromatograph and conditions without calibrating Unspiked Unspiked sample of a Spiked Unspiked pair used for Spike Report Spiked Spiked sample used in single level spike analyses unknown smp and spiked smp Spike 1 of 2 First spiked sample used for Spike Reports Spike 2 of 2 Second spiked sample used for Spike Reports Duplicate Duplicate sample used for Duplicate Reports Begin Calibration First calibration mixture to be used in Calibration Summary Report When this run type is encountered ChromQuest stores the current retention times of all named peaks These are displayed in the reports as the Old RT After the End Calib sample is run the updated retention times are stored and displayed as New RT in the Calibration Report In addition the average response factor for each peak is calculated the percent RSD is calculated and compared to the expected percent RSD from the peak table Compounds falling above this percent trigger the failure action End Calibration Last calibration mixture to be used in Calibration Summary Report Baseline Check Enable baseline check Run Type Parameters For each run type selected you might be prompted to enter parameters necessary for the ru
264. phy gt ChromQuest SI Go to step step 4 2 From the computer desktop double click the ChromQuest icon or choose Start gt Programs gt Chromatography gt ChromQuest The Main Menu window appears see Figure 1 where the icons for the instruments in PP 8 your Enterprise are displayed You administrate and configure instruments from this The Instrument window appears You control instruments and process data from this window 4 Ifthe Instrument window does not open with the Instrument Wizard displayed click the Instrument Wizard button in the command toolbar window id 3 Double click the icon for your instrument If required log on The Instrument Wizard contains shortcuts to four main tasks Figure 49 Instrument Wizard window Instrument Wizard New Instrument x Create or modify a method Help z Create a sequence Run one sample Run a sequence of samples IV Show at instrument startup 48 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard Creating an Acquisition Method This procedure is a general case Your instrument setup depends on the type of instrument you have e For information on creating a data acquisition method for a SpectraSYSTEM Thermo instrument refer to the ChromQuest User Guide for the SpectraSYSTEM LC e For information on creating a data acquisition method for a Surveyor Plus instrument refer to the ChromQuest User Guide fo
265. pretreatment file at the time the change is made Prompt for reason when saving Pretreatment This option requires the user to enter a reason for each change when the pretreatment file is saved e Do not prompt for reason When this option is selected changes are documented but the user is not required to enter a reason for the changes Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 177 Sequence Operations Thermo Scientific Whenever you want to automate the acquisition or processing of chromatography data using ChromQuest you use a sequence A sequence is a work list for ChromQuest that tells the order for runs to be acquired processed or both A sequence is normally used with an autosampler however it can also be used for manual injections if they are injected in the exact order specified by the sequence Contents e Overview of Sequence Operations e Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard e Creating a Reprocessing Sequence e Sequence Spreadsheet Basics e The Sequence Spreadsheet e Setting the Sequence Properties e Enabling the Sequence Audit Trail e Bracketed Calibrations e Sequence Reprocessing e Sequence Summary Reports ChromQuest User Guide 179 4 Sequence Operations Overview of Sequence Operations Overview of Sequence Operations The sequence is the cornerstone of automatic operation of the ChromQuest Chromatography Data System With a sequence you can automatically acquire process and store multip
266. quence at the start of the sequence This is the correct mode of line for systems that contain an HS2000 or an HS 850 Bracketing Select the type of bracketing you wish to perform See Bracketed Calibrations on page 217 for details e None Select None if you do not wish to bracket calibrations e Standard Select this type if you wish to perform the standard mode of bracketing calibrations e Std w Clear Calib Select this type if you wish to perform the standard mode of bracketing calibrations clearing the calibration before the start of each calibration set e Sequence Select this type if you want to perform the sequence mode of bracketing calibrations e Seq w Back Calc Select this type if you want to perform the sequence mode of bracketing calibrations and back calculate calibration runs e Review Results review pause after each run Select this option if you want the sequence to pause between runs for you to review results Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 213 4 Sequence Operations Acquisition Using a Sequence Calibration review pause after each calibration set Select this option if you want the sequence to pause after each calibration set where a calibration set is defined as one or more calibration runs that occur in a sequence e Printing Print method reports Select this check box if you want the custom report defined in the method to be printed for each run of
267. quence reports pause after each calibration set Begin run Immediately o e Sequence information Cancel Help Enter the Sequence Name to be used or select the sequence file from a list of available sequence files by clicking the File button e Run Range Select the range of the sequence to be run All Select this option to execute all runs in the sequence Selection If you have currently selected a series of runs in your sequence spreadsheet by highlighting them select this option to run only the highlighted runs Range Enter a range of runs to be executed For example an entry of 4 6 executes runs 4 5 and 6 of the sequence An entry of 4 designates the fourth run through the end of the sequence Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Acquisition Using a Sequence e Mode Select the manner by which you want to handle data processing and bracketed calibration if used Tower If your instrument is configured for Dual Tower you can select the tower mode to be used for the sequence run Selections include Dual Front and Rear Processing mode Select a mode for running the sequence Normal downloads the sequence one vial at a time It is the correct setting for all HPLC runs and can be used with some GC runs High Throughput performs two injections per vial for those GCs that support this mode of operation Full Download downloads the entire se
268. r Acquisition option This causes the Sequence Wizard to prompt you for information required for data acquisition c Leave the Amount values at their default values of 1 3 Click Next to continue to the next page of the Sequence Wizard The Sequence Wizard Unknowns page appears 60 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table Figure 62 Sequence Wizard Unknowns page Sequence Wizard Unknowns ma i fmm H S fmm oo a DO o 4 Enter information about the unknown run types a Inthe Sample ID box type Test Then click the blue right arrow and choose Line number This causes each sample to be identified with the sequence line number You can use sample IDs to perform file searches from the ChromQuest data system b In the Data Path box browse to an existing path by clicking the File Open button For example browse to the directory Drive ChromQuest Projects Default Data If other users have already performed this tutorial place your data in a unique folder by adding another folder name to the end of the data path c In the Data File box type Test Then click the blue right arrow and choose Line Number This causes each data file to be identified with the line number in the sequence table Using a numbered identification ensures the data file name for each run is a unique name preventing errors that occur if you try to acquire data using an existing data
269. r Guide 71 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files 72 Figure 74 Method Custom Report window E Method Custom Report lol x Times New Roman fc z B Z u pl amp Rnl Z zolo fos z Mines Retention i Time What If Changing Integration Parameters ChromOQuest User Guide Another important aspect of using a computerized data system is the ability to customize the integration using Integration Timed Events In this part of the Tutorial you use the multi calibration level 3 dat data file provided to become familiar with how to enter integration timed events into your method and to view the effects of some of these events Refer to Chapter 1 Examples of Integration Timed Events of the Chrom Quest Chromatography Data System Reference Guide for more information on integration events To become familiar with the graphical programming feature in ChromQuest 1 Open the multi calibration level 3 dat data file a b Choose File gt Data gt Open to display the Open Data File dialog box Browse to the Drive ChromQuest Data directory on your computer Select the in multi calibration level 3 dat the list box From the Method list select Original Acquisition Click Open Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files 2 Click Analyze to analyze the chromatogram and display the baselines Figure 75 Chromatogram E Channel A Time 9 99467 Minutes Amplitude 0 254 MAU
270. r baseline calculations and the tests that should be performed on those channels The number of rows of the spreadsheet equals the number of acquisition channels based on instrument configuration plus the number of multi chromatogram channels defined in the Spectral Options window if the scanning detector is configured Channel Each entry in this column contains the name of an acquisition channel specified by instrument configuration or the multi chromatogram definitions The entries cannot be edited Enable Noise Test Selecting this check box indicates that detector noise should be calculated on the corresponding channel If this box is cleared the Threshold edit field to its right is disabled otherwise it is enabled Threshold Noise This is used to specify the maximum acceptable value for the calculated noise If the calculated noise is greater than the Threshold the baseline check is considered to have failed Enable Drift Test Selecting this check box indicates that detector drift should be calculated on the corresponding channel Threshold Drift hr This is used to specify the maximum acceptable value for the calculated drift If the calculated noise is greater than the Threshold the baseline check is considered to have failed ChromQuest User Guide 83 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method Aux Traces This tab is used to acquire traces of instrument status paramet
271. r increase this number adjust the digits in your brackets accordingly For example lt 0033 gt gives a 4 digit number Data path Enter the path where your data files are to be stored You can also select an existing path by clicking the File button and then selecting a path from the paths that are accessible to you Data file Enter a name for the data files In order for unique data file names to be created automatically you can have the system generate file names for you automatically based on a system parameter Click the blue arrow button and select a parameter to be used for the basis of your data file names You can select more than one parameter The software automatically appends the DAT extension to the data file names however you can change or remove this Figure 165 Sequence Wizard Unknowns options menu Line Number Increment Number Sample ID User Name Method Name Instrument Name Date and Time Open File For example you can use the Sample ID as the data file name Note In order to generate unique file names automatically for each data file you should make sure that the Line Number or Increment Number is included somewhere in the file name If you are creating a reprocessing sequence click the Open file button and select the file from the list of existing file names Number of unknown runs in sequence Enter the number of unknown samples to be acquired or reprocessed with the sequence Repetiti
272. r the Surveyor LC The first step toward acquiring a data file is to create a data acquisition method To create a data acquisition method perform the procedures contained in this topic in the following order 1 Setting up the acquisition parameters 2 Running a preliminary sample 3 Setting Integration parameters graphically Setting Up the Acquisition Parameters To set acquisition run time and sampling rate 1 If the Instrument Wizard is not displayed recall it by clicking the Instrument Wizard button in the command toolbar 2 In the Instrument Wizard click Create Or Modify A Method to invoke the Method Wizard displayed below Figure 50 Method Wizard window Method Wizard New Instrument xi Create a new method Help Modify the curent method Ke Modify a method on disk Lo i Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 49 2 Tutorial Using the Instrument Wizard 50 ChromQuest User Guide 3 In the Method Wizard click the Create A New Method button to start creating your method The Method Wizard sets up a bank of buttons at the bottom of the Instrument window that you use to step through all dialog boxes for method generation A Save button is also provided J Open the Instrument Setup dialog box This is the first dialog box displayed when you invoke the Method Wizard The Instrument Setup dialog box appears Figure 51 Instrument Setup dialog box D
273. r the trace then select a Peak from the list The calibration information for the selected peak will always be displayed as in the example below Figure 220 Calibration information for the selected peak benzene Detector 1 Average RF 0 928568 RF StDev 0 0820473 RF RSD 8 83589 Scaling None LSQ Weighting None Force Through Zero Off Replicate Mode Wt Average Weight 100 Fit Type Linear y 1 0086x 0 0148853 Goodness of fit r 2 0 994898 Select Template only if you are creating or editing a calibration report template If you select this for a method custom report the information will not be printed When you select Template calibration information for all peaks in the calibration will automatically be printed as defined in the Calibration crp calibration report template file Click on OK to add the calibration information to your custom report ChromQuest User Guide 251 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Adding a Calibration Table to the Custom Report The right mouse click gt Insert Report gt Calibration Table command brings up a dialog box where you designate information to be included in a Custom Report calibration table Figure 221 Calibration Table Setup dialog box Calibration Table Setup xi Calibration data source Source Trace lt Template gt Peak lt Template gt z View options IV View replicate RF IV View replicate identification information
274. range automatically to the range of the longest chromatogram or select the Use this range option to enter an absolute range in minutes You can click Get Current Limits to bring in the X Axis range from the current chromatogram window This is useful because it allows you to use the zoom function to identify the desired region of the chromatogram and automatically enter the range values Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Figure 28 Data Graph Properties dialog box Axis Setup tab Data Graph Properties Include sample ID in legend Include data file name in lege Shout arid Once you have set a user defined X Axis range you can return to the normal mode by selecting the Autoscale option Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 33 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Chromatogram Operations There are a number of chromatogram comparison and mathematical operations that are available from the chromatogram window To access these options right click and choose Operations from the shortcut menu Figure 29 Operations menu Add Trace Add Multiple Traces Axis Setup Annotations Appearance Full Unzoom Clear Overlays Operations Move Trace Utilities gt Stack Traces Graphical Programming gt Align Properties Stretch Normalize Smooth Ast Derivative 2nd Derivative Add Subtract Multiply
275. ration Cuives x 60562050 soit eskeSeane prerales Se es ae re 139 Groups and Group Calibration bya tie dea e tae te ie Aiea ies 145 Defining a Group cotsan wit nks eo ka tO eet d cee bet oie 146 Uncalibrated Ranges sc aain ih aieia aiaee abao ias ioa ane a 148 Group Calibration Calibrated Range ic cake cl vaios mie bao ee oe 150 Calibrated Peak Grouping Named Peaks 000 00 e eee eee 160 Reporting Group Amounts 60 ccc eee eee eee 163 Advanced Method ptiGiis os oc sd ascs la atc sacs a ata acs eae sak Rate 164 Data RO REG sw besten win tse Wale Seal acne dh a are dale fal chanel deed tay 164 Custom Parainetcts Si 20a5 aL ante ota date Gets Ge tee ee eS 165 Column Performance Parameters 2 s sccs sevbea a ciaosie den a ay uta cn ted teiade ante arise 167 Piles step aid vente ait game y Keia phen eae athe Racers unsere eS 169 Saving a Default Method 22 00 occu dk oak bn dace ae een 171 Creating Multi Detector Methods 0 gocsie d ceed ae wh ks eek Dees 171 Creating Multi Wavelength Methods 0 00 cee ee eee eee 172 Offline fnstrumentsea sine on WAG PES E E A ER 173 Starting Offline Processing sik oGl te wane ote ode nage ea ey 173 Prerreatment Files asip itie iena pe a aati a e aa e 174 Pretreatment Properties Description 0 00 eee ce eee 176 Pretreatment Properties Audit Tratl o 00 cea cis eee bales Hee te oe 177 Chapter4 Sequence Operations 0 cece eee eee e eee eee eens 179
276. ration curve equation for the standard peak according to the fit type selected linear quadratic point to point and so on Conc concentration of peak of interest Area area of the peak of interest Mult STD Mult of designated STD peak Mult STD Mult of peak of interest Manual RF If you wish to assign a response factor to be used for a peak instead of the response factor calculated from the standard data enter that value here If a manual response factor is present in this field it is used to calculate amounts for this peak instead of using the calibration curve Low Conc You can enter a concentration lower limit in this column After each analysis ChromQuest can compare the calculated concentration of the peak to this value If the value falls below the lower limit value in order for a message to be posted in the Instrument Activity log a post run sequence action must be selected High Conc You can enter a concentration upper limit in this column After each analysis ChromQuest can compare the calculated concentration of the peak to this value If the concentration value falls above the upper limit value in order for a message to be posted in the Instrument Activity log a post run sequence action must be selected QC Reports Parameters The following parameters in the peak table are used for calculation of QC Reports Check Std 1 5 Conc Enter the amount of component present in the designated Check Standard
277. ration table View replicate identification information Select this check box if you want to display the User Sample ID and Calib Time for each replicate Number of levels to print before break Type the number of calibration levels to print on each line Click OK to accept and enter the calibration table on your custom report template To quickly remove a calibration table right click the table and choose Delete Table Run Reports You can add results to your method custom report by inserting a Report To add a report to your custom report right click and choose Insert Report Note that the available reports for the sequence custom report are different from those available for the method custom report Figure 223 Method custom report Insert Report options menu Insert Field gt Insert Graph gt Insert Report Calibration Info Insert Object Calibration T able 3 Data Audit Trail Pela Ti Electronic Signatures T able x i Ee i Generic Report Drawing gt PE Z k Instrument Activity Log sk Instrument Configuration Report Margin Setup Method Audit Trail Print Preview Method Report Print Pretreatment Audit Trail Run Report Header Footer Spectrum Report Toolbar v Ruler Choose Run Report Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 253 5 Custom Reports Method Custom Reports Report Properties 254 ChromQuest User Guide The Run Report dialog box appears where you ca
278. rations Sequence Summary Reports Figure 195 Run Sequence dialog box Run Sequence D enterprise Projects D efault S equences d a ls m e Export Summary If you wish to export the summary report information select the Export summary check box in the Sequence Properties dialog box You must then designate a path for the summary export file Figure 196 Sequence Properties dialog box Options page Sequence Properties Vv SSE SSS ms l D Senterprise Projects D enterprise Projects D efault Methods D Senterprise Projects Defaults Data ry Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 221 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Summary Reports 222 The summary is exported to a file entitled Sequence Summary 000005000 txt where the numbers represent nBatchTower nReportRunTypeID nReportNumber Create a Sequence Summary Report Template ChromQuest comes with a default sequence summary report template SeqSummary tpl which can be used as is or modified for your own use To create or modify a sequence summary report template use the Advanced Report generator Designating Sequence Summary Runs ChromQuest User Guide In order for a run to be included in a sequence summary report it must be designated as a Summary Run in the sequence This is selected in the Run Type for each run From the sequence spreadsheet click the Run Type button for a run A dialog box appears where you designate the type of run
279. rd Reports page 11 64 ChromQuest User Guide e Select the Include Unknown Runs In Summary Report check box e Select the Include Calibration Runs In Summary Report check box By default the Summary Begin run type which is created by checking either of the Summary report check boxes uses the Summary tpl template This template reports the external standard concentrations of the sample peaks The external standard concentrations for all the runs in the sequence are reported in the Summary report after the sequence run is completed Click Finish The sequence table appears Figure 66 Sequence table E Sequence Test seq Run Type Level Conc Overridel Reps Vial Volume ul SampleID Method caLsMB WO oo AT Test001 2 L Summary Run 1 Test002 Test002 dat EI Summary Fun i As 10 Test003_ Testmet Test 03 dat Su Aa Test004 Test004 dat PTT ee ee a ee _ gt At this point the sequence is set up to run one calibration standard and three unknowns Notice the Sample ID s and Data File names are incremented automatically to prevent duplication Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table To run a calibration standard you must enter its calibration level in the Level column of the sequence table This has been done automatically by the Sequence Wizard Unknown runs always have a Level of 0 The information in the Run Type field can be abbreviated if
280. re finished click OK The peaks in the box labeled Peaks in this Group become the defined peaks for this group and the Group table appears once more 7 Ifyou are using a calibrated peak group you should not enter any Level information in the table as the group total is calculated using the calibrated amounts for the individual peaks in the group To leave the group table click the upper left corner of the Group table spreadsheet Once your peak group has been defined it can be reported by selecting the Report groups option in the report properties 162 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Reporting Group Amounts Group amounts can be reported in any report by selecting the Groups option in the Run Report dialog box when adding a run report to your custom report Or you can right click an existing run report table in your report choose Report Properties and select the Groups option To report peaks that are part of an Uncalibrated Range group make sure to select the Unnamed peaks option Figure 150 Run Report dialog box i Run Report Vv Name Retention Time ISTD concentration Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 163 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options Advanced Method Options Advanced Method Options are available for users who have a need to go beyond the simple data acquisition and analysis provided by ChromQuest by customizing re
281. re you can enter the Maximum Levels to be displayed in the spreadsheet Type the number of levels to be displayed and then press ENTER to accept Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 147 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration 148 Set Anchor The blue anchor icon indicates what column is used to anchor the right left scrolling in your sequence spreadsheet Once this anchor is set columns to the right of the anchor scroll to the right and left Columns to the left of the anchor do not scroll To change the anchor click the name of the column you wish to use as anchor and click Set Anchor The blue anchor moves to the designated anchor column Note When using the anchor it is best to remove all unnecessary columns from the spreadsheet and make the spreadsheet as wide as possible before you set the anchor If you set the anchor to a column that does not currently show on the spreadsheet you will not be able to scroll the spreadsheet Uncalibrated Range ChromQuest User Guide The Uncalibrated Range group type is used to enter a response factor for uncalibrated peaks eluting within a specified retention time range When the chromatogram is analyzed the concentration of unnamed peaks eluting within the uncalibrated range is calculated using the response factor entered for the uncalibrated range Defining an Uncalibrated Range group is done using a stored chromatogram Since you are simply defining a range for unca
282. rence limit between the actual amount and the calculated amount is entered as Check Std RD In the Sequence select QC Check Std in the Run Type column for the samples to be used as QC check standard After the QC check samples have been analyzed the QC Check Standard Report is printed showing the expected concentration value from the Peak table the calculated concentration the calculated relative difference for the sample the relative difference limit from the Peak table and the Pass Fail status of the result The following is an example of a QC Check Standard report Figure 251 OC Check Standard report File Sample ID Acquired c ChromQuest data multi calibration level Multilevel Calibration Level 2 2 18 99 12 53 38 PM 2 dat Channel A Compound Expected Conc Actual Conc RD Actual RD Limit Status Peakl 25 000 20 000 20 000 25 000 Passed Peak2 15 000 6 000 60 000 25000 FAILED Peak3 25 000 20 000 20 000 25 000 Passed Peak4 25 000 20 000 20 000 25 000 Passed The following equation is used in this QC Standard report RD Abs Expected Conc Actual Conc 100 Expected Conc 274 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting Sequence System Suitability Report If you want your sequence report to include a Sequence System Suitability report right click and choose Insert Report gt Sequence Suitability from the shortcut menu A table template will be inserted into your sequenc
283. reports that summarize the runs and results from a sequence Sequence summary reports can be printed automatically at the end of the sequence or they can be generated during sequence reprocessing You can also summarize designated runs within a sequence A sequence summary report can be easily generated using the Advanced Report template Summary tpl To print this summary report at the end of your sequence or at any point during your sequence click the first run to be included in the summary and select Run Type When the Run Type dialog box appears select the Begin Summary run type and enter the Summary tpl template to be used All designated Summary runs from the Begin Summary run to the End Summary run inclusive are summarized by this report Figure 194 Sample Run Type s dialog box Sample Run Type s Clear All Calibration Clear Calibration at Level Print Calibration Report JAverage Replicates Clear Replicates Begin Loop JEnd Loop Shutdown Pint Additonal Repons bmw A OBegin System Suitability OSystem Suitability Standard OEnd System Suitability Begin Summary Summary Run End Summary vial Summary OOC Check Standard OBegin Calibration End Calibration Baseline Check Baseline File To print sequence summary reports during the sequence make sure you have selected the printing option when you start the sequence run 220 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Ope
284. romatogram window is a display of Time and Amplitude These values change as you move the cursor and reflect the time and amplitude of the trace where the cursor is located If you have more than one trace you can change the display to another trace by clicking the chromatogram trace with the mouse If the traces are displayed in different colors the color of the Time and Amplitude display reflect the color of the trace displayed Scrolling the chromatogram Once you have zoomed in on a chromatogram you can scroll the chromatogram to the right or left without losing the zoom This is done by pressing the CTRL SHIFT keys and moving the mouse until the cursor changes to a hand and dragging it to the left or right You can also scroll the X or Y axis to view features that might be out of the range To do this press the CTRL SHIFT keys while the cursor is outside the graph area yet near the axis of interest The cursor changes to an up down arrow near the Y axis or a left right arrow near the X axis Moving the mouse in this mode scrolls the graph up down or left right on the axis To restore the original view right click the chromatogram window and choose Full Unzoom from the shortcut menu 18 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Adding a Trace Viewing Multiple Chromatograms Thermo Scientific The chromatogram window is used to view data either current data real ti
285. rompt appears in the window Click on trace Click the chromatogram that you wish to perform the operation on The result trace appears in the window Figure 43 Trace before 1 derivative E Channel A x Retention Time i Figure 44 1 derivative trace displayed with original trace E Channel A Jof x Figure 45 2 4 derivative displayed with original trace E Channel A olx Chdnnel 4 PHAeSTDS 1 7k oh ee ChromQuest User Guide y 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Addition To add two traces right click and choose Operations gt Add from the shortcut menu A prompt appears in the window Click on 1 trace Select the first file on the chromatogram A second prompt Click on 2 trace appears Select the trace to be added to the first by clicking the trace The result trace appears in the window Note In order for this operation to be valid both traces must have the same sampling frequency Subtraction To subtract two traces right click and choose Operations gt Subtract from the shortcut menu A prompt appears in the window Click on 1st trace Select the first trace by clicking the chromatogram A second prompt Click on 2nd trace appears Select the trace to be subtracted from the first by clicking the trace The result trace appears in the window Note In order for this operation to be valid both traces must have the same sampling frequency Multiplicatio
286. rrently selected run in the spreadsheet Open Data This command opens the data file associated with the currently selected run in the spreadsheet The data file is opened with last results If last results is not available the data file is recalled with the original results Process Sequence This command opens the Process Sequence dialog box and enables you to reprocess all or P q 8 y P part of the current sequence Run Sequence This command opens the Run Sequence dialog box to enable you to start the sequence acquisition Thermo Scientific Fill Down Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Sequence Spreadsheet Basics e Insert New Sequence This command starts the sequence wizard to create a new sequence which is inserted into q your current sequence below the currently selected row e Properties This command opens the Sequence Properties dialog box where you can add edit the sequence description and select default paths for data and method files Note When copying or pasting spreadsheets from ChromQuest to other applications hidden parameters that do not appear in the spreadsheet such as action item parameters are not pasted The Fill Down command enables you to automatically copy spreadsheet information from one field or row down through the rest of the spreadsheet To use this command first select a field or a row by highlighting it with your mouse Then right click and choose Fill Down If
287. rs from Sample ID are automatically entered in order to associate calibration IDs with your data file IDs If you wish you can have the system automatically generate a different Calibration ID for you based on a system parameter Click the blue arrow button and select a parameter to be used for the basis of the Calibration ID Figure 168 Sequence Wizard Calibration options menu Increment Number e Calibration path Enter the path where the calibration files are saved You can select the path by clicking the File open button and selecting an existing path from those displayed 186 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard e Calibration file Enter a name for the calibration data files The system automatically applies the Cal_ prefix to each calibration file in the sequence You can change this if you wish The identifiers from Data File are automatically entered in order to associate calibration file names with your data file names You can change these by clicking the blue button and selecting the parameter to be used for the basis of the calibration file name You can select more than one parameter Figure 169 Sequence Wizard Calibration options menu Line Number Increment Number Sample ID User Name Method Name Instrument Name Calibration Level Calibration Set Date and Time Open File Note In order to generate unique file names automatica
288. ructure single chromatograph Each channel can have its own complete and independent parameters including sampling rate run time integration events external events calibration and reporting Although the method file is a separate file the information contained in the method is saved in the raw data file at the time of acquisition This way the original method can be reproduced even if the method file was subsequently modified Data File Storage in Networked Operation When running samples the file is stored locally in a temporary file At the end of each run the file is copied to its final destination on the Windows 2000 XP Server If this operation is not successful an error log is generated A watchdog program that periodically checks the network monitors this error log As soon as the network is up the files queued on the local driver are copied to the Windows 2000 XP Server Note If the network is down the file is not analyzed and no report is generated After the network comes back up the user must reprocess the data to get his her reports Data File Structure Thermo Scientific A data file is created on the designated drive whenever you acquire a sample using ChromQuest or when you save a data file using the Save As 32 bit command The file contains the following information e File Information Header This contains information such as the date and time of acquisition e Complete method parameters used to acquire
289. rveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 15 18 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 508 Surveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 09 23 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 507 Surveyor System3 xl To view details of any line in the instrument activity log click the line to highlight it and then right click within the spreadsheet From the shortcut menu you can view details of the highlighted line print it or print the entire activity log Figure 102 Instrument Activity Log window Show Detail menu E Instrument Activity Log System 10 21 2001 8 15 16 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 516 Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 8 09 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 517 Surveyor System3 i System 10 21 2001 8 03 22 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 451A Surveyor System3 _ System 10 21 2001 7 57 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire Show Detail urveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 51 20 PM_ SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire lt ica ce urveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 45 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire eae urveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 39 21 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire Export urveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 33 28 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire Archive urveyor System3 System 10 21 2001 7 27 24 PM SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire Purge urveyor System3 E System 10 21 2001 7 21 23 PM_SPEC_5 Sequence Acquire urveyor Systemi System 10 21 2001
290. s now calculated using the Calib Weight weighting factor set in the peak table 114 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup A new calibration curve is calculated 160000 0 5 10 15 20 Amount The new calibration point x2 y2 is used to draw the calibration curve with the area y2 calculated as follows 4 area1 area2 aream m Jew b a w where y2 area of calibration point x2 y2 W Calib Weight expressed as a percentage y Last area Turning Calibration Averaging On or Off Calibration averaging can be done in one of two ways One way is to turn on automatic calibration averaging by selecting this item as part of Method gt Properties The other way is to designate a calibration run type to Average Replicates These selections designate how averaging is to be treated for the method In order for a calibrated peak s areas to be averaged you must also set the Calib Flag for that peak in the Peak Table to Wt Average If you do not want a peak s areas to be averaged set the Calib Flag for that peak to Replace Automatically Average Replicates You can set up your method so that all calibrations are averaged by choosing Method gt Properties and clicking the Calibration tab Here you can select the option to automatically average after every calibration To turn averaging on make sure there is a check mark next to the Automatically average replicates prompt Th
291. s of Operation Instrument Wizard Instrument Wizard Each time you start an instrument application by double clicking the instrument icon from the main window an Instrument Wizard appears This wizard is designed to direct you to the basic functions of the instrument window Online Instrument Wizard Thermo Scientific When you are working in the online Instrument window you can open the online Instrument Wizard Figure 2 Instrument Wizard window Instrument Wizard New Instrument i x Create or modify a method Create a sequence Run one sample ry Run a sequence of samples J Show at instrument startup e Create or modify a method This button starts the Method Wizard that enables you to step through creating or modifying a method e Create a sequence This button starts the Sequence Wizard that steps you through creation of an acquisition or reprocessing sequence e Run one sample This button opens a dialog box where you can use a stored method to run a single sample e Runa sequence of samples This button opens the Run Sequence dialog box where you can start data acquisition using a stored sequence ChromQuest User Guide 3 4 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure e Show at instrument startup If this box is selected the Instrument Wizard appears each time this instrument is started Offline Instrument Wizard If you are using an instrument offl
292. s peak e Ifyou want to add more peaks to the peak table return to step 4 e Otherwise continue to step 7 The number of the current peak and the total number of peaks in the chromatogram are displayed on the right of the dialog box When you have reached the last detected peak in the chromatogram the Next button is unavailable 7 After you finish adding peaks to your peak table click Done 8 To view the Peak Table a Click the Peak Group Tables button in the command toolbar b Click the Named Peaks tab Each peak you defined appears as a row in the Peak Table spreadsheet along with its retention time and the other parameters you entered Note that if you already had peaks in your peak table the peaks you just defined are added to those already present Information in the Peak Table can be edited by scrolling through the rows and columns See the topic Peak Table on page 128 for details on the contents of the Peak Table Thermo Scientific ChromOQuest User Guide 57 2 Tutorial Creating a Single Level Calibration Figure 59 Peak Group Tables zax Named Peaks Groups Point to Point Point to Point Point to Point c Do not enter information in the other columns of the Peak Table at this time Close the Peak Table Your method now contains a Peak Table for the identification and quantitation of your unknown sample types 9 Before you proceed save the m
293. save the file under a new file name Figure 187 Sequence Properties dialog box Audit Trail tab Sequence Properties Enable audit trail Once the Enable Audit Trail option is selected the following options become available for documenting changes Prompt for reason at every change This option requires the user to enter a reason for every subsequent change to the sequence at the time the change is made e Prompt for reason when saving Sequence This option requires the user to enter a reason for each change when the Sequence is saved e Do not prompt for reason When this option is selected changes are documented but the user is not required to enter a reason for the changes Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 211 4 Sequence Operations Acquisition Using a Sequence Acquisition Using a Sequence 212 ChromQuest User Guide Once you have created and saved a sequence you can use it to acquire and process data To start a sequence acquisition click the Sequence Run button or choose Control gt Sequence Run A dialog box appears where you select the sequence to run Figure 188 Run Sequence dialog box x r Sequence information Sequence name m Run range Mode All Tower N A z Selection Processing mode Normal x Range Bracketing None x Printing T Review Print method reports Results review pause after each run i Calibration revien J Print se
294. save your current sequence under a new file name type the new name in the File name box and then click Save To save your current sequence using an existing file name click the file to highlight it and then click Save 224 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Custom Reports Thermo Scientific One of the most important aspects of using a chromatography data system is getting the results into a useful format While use of default standardized report formats is handy often a standard report does not include enough information or it contains information that is not necessary Using the ChromQuest Custom Report editor you can create completely customized reports or edit the standard reports to include only the information you want presented in the most efficient way for your laboratory With the Custom Report editor you can create a custom report for your current method The method custom report is saved as part of the method and is used by default when you view or print the method custom report The method Custom Report editor can also be used to create custom report templates that can be opened from other methods making it easy to use the same report or modify it for other methods The Advanced Report editor lets you create advanced customized reports including summary reports that can be viewed or printed This advanced reporting editor uses a spreadsheet like approach where formulas can be entered for creating completely customiz
295. se values exceeds this limit the group is not used to update the calibration e Scale Use this parameter to apply a scaling factor to the calibration curve This factor is applied to the entered amounts prior to computing the calibration curve The purpose of using a scaling factor is to create a relationship between areas or heights and amounts that can be approximated by a polynomial fit A scaling factor can be applied to any fit type The available scaling operations are None 1 X 1 X In X 1 In X sqrt X x2 154 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration e Weighting Method Select a weighting method to be used for calculation of least squares regression fits 1 Response 1 Response2 1 Amount 1 Amount2 or none Weighting gives increased importance to smaller concentrations and areas A scaling factor can be applied to linear quadratic and cubic fits e Level 1 2 x You must designate one or more calibration levels to be used in calculation of a group response factor For each level enter the amount of the group in that calibration sample Note Occasionally you might want to calibrate one group with fewer levels than the other groups in your group table for example when you have more than one calibration mixture for the same concentration level To avoid introducing error in your calibration curve you can cause the group area to be ignored a
296. search settings and use new criteria for searching Opening Method and Sequence Files ChromQuest User Guide The Open dialog boxes for Method and Sequence files are identical Figure 8 Open Method File dialog box Open Method File Look in E Methods a multilevel calibration met a OC met a Test met fa VOC met cl E File name OC met Files of type Method files met Find files that match these criteria Text in Desc Organics 7 Created yesterday x Eind Now Analyst Smith Modified fary time x New Search Search results Searching for Method and Sequence Files The criteria you can use to search for specific method and sequence files include selection of specific text found in the file description the Text in Desc list Analyst name list and date Created list or last Modified list Thermo Scientific Saving Files Saving Data Files Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure To save a current Method or Sequence file using the current method or sequence name click Save and select the type of file you are saving If you want to save a file using a new name choose File and the type of file to save and then Save As to specify the new name Choosing File gt Data gt Save As 32 bit saves the current data file along with the current method in a single file This command is only enabled when the current data file is
297. sis Run after calibration runs only Calib or after every run and calibration Run amp Calib ChromQuest User Guide 129 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 130 ChromQuest User Guide e LOD This parameter is used to calculate and report the ASTM LOD Limit of Detection value that is used to determine if the peak is within the Limits of Detection as previously determined for the method The value entered here is the S N ratio signal to noise ratio to be used for the calculation for this peak This calculation is valid only for ESTD or ISTD methods LOQ This parameter is used to calculate and report the ASTM LOQ Limit of Quantitation value that is used to determine if the peak is within the Limit of Quantitation as previously determined for the method The value entered here is the S N ratio signal to noise ratio to be used for the calculation for this peak This calculation is valid only for ESTD or ISTD methods Quantitate Choose whether the calibration and quantitation are to be based on peak height or peak area Note If you are doing both Peak and Group quantitation using internal standards both Peaks and Groups must use the same quantitation measurement type area or height Fit Type This option determines how the calibration curve is fit to the data Note You have five choices for how the calibration curves are drawn point to point linear and quadratic cubic and Average RF fits You must have a
298. sociated values until you have entered all the concentration levels c Optional In the Units box type a unit of measurement Note This unit label can be displayed in the method custom reports The concentration levels in the Peak Table are unitless Typically you enter the concentrations of your calibration standards in the same units as you want to report the samples d Inthe ISTD ID box leave the internal standard ID set to its default of 0 You are creating an external standard calibration See Chapter 3 Method Development for details on performing an internal standard calibration Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Creating a Single Level Calibration e Inthe Ref ID box leave the reference ID set to its default of 0 See Chapter 3 Method Development for details on using reference peaks to adjust the expected retention times of your analytes f In the Retention Time Window area i Select the Relative option ii Type 2 5 in the percentage box This creates a relative retention time window of 2 5 for your analytes In the chromatogram shown here the retention time windows for the peaks are displayed as bars above the peak apexes Figure 58 Chromatogram showing retention time 100 ___ U 6000 254nm 2 LCTest37 Retention Time mAU 3 0 0 05 1 0 15 2 0 25 3 0 35 4 0 45 5 0 55 6 0 65 7 0 Minutes 6 Click Next to move to the next detected peak or click Back to return to a previou
299. sor to the title area above the column you wish to size The cursor turns into two vertical lines with arrows Click and drag the cursor until the column is the desired size then release the mouse ChromQuest User Guide 201 4 Sequence Operations The Sequence Spreadsheet The Sequence Spreadsheet The following fields appear in the sequence spreadsheet Although you can automatically create a sequence in the New Sequence Wizard you should review the sequence to make sure the information for each run is correct before it is run e Status This field becomes active when a sequence acquisition or processing is in progress It indicates the current status of the run e Run Type Select a Run Type from the available types by clicking the arrow button in the field A dialog box appears where you can select the run type Figure 182 Sample Run Types dialog box Sample Run Type s W Clear All Calibration Clear Calibration at Level Frint Calibration Report JAverage Replicates Clear Replicates Print Additional Reports Begin System Suitability _ System Suitability Standard _JEnd System Suitability Begin Summary Summary Run End Summary vial Summary OBC Check Standard OBegin Calibration _JEnd Calibration Baseline Check Baseline File Clear All Calibration Clears all calibration response factors and coefficients for all calibration levels 202 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo
300. sults or linking to external data systems or networks When you choose Method gt Advanced from the main menu a tabbed window appears where you can set up various advanced options for your method Data Export Click the Export tab to set parameters for exporting data to separate files on your disk Select the Export Enabled option if you want the method to include data export Figure 151 Advanced Method Options Export dialog box fal Advanced Method Options FID of x Export Custom Parameters Column Performance Files Advanced Reports Parameters to export Export these parameters ESTD concentration ISTD concentration NORM concentration Width Start Time Stop Time Current RF Average RF Relative RT r Export options Field separator lt Tab gt v Path for export files D enterprise Projects D efault Data E xport eS J Enable ODBC Data source names E Table name From the drop down list select the type of information to be exported Choices include Peaks for export of peak information and Groups for export of group information Note Microsoft Data Access Components MDAC 2 5 or higher is required for ODBC export A version of this is on the ChromQuest CD ROM under Updates 164 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Advanced Method Options e Parameters to export Export these parameters From the list of export information optio
301. t Calibration 2 Test04 multilevel calibration met Calibration 2 Test05 multilevel calibration met Calibration 2 Test06 multilevel calibration met Calibration 1 Test0 multilevel calibration met Calibration 1 Test08 multilevel calibration met Automatic calibration averaging is a quick way to average calibration replicates that are grouped together and is the most common use of averaging Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 117 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 118 Rolling Average Calibration ChromQuest User Guide If you have entered a number for replicates to be used in calibration on the Calibration page of the Method Properties dialog box a rolling average is calculated for replicates as described in the following Figure 119 Method Properties Calibration dialog box Method Properties M The rolling replicate average is done as in this example For an acquisition sequence where S Standard and U Unknown and the number of replicates in rolling average 4 S1 U1 S2 U2 S3 U3 S4 U4 S5 U5 S6 U6 S7 U7 In the above acquisition sequence U1 would be quantitated using S1 U2 would be quantitated using the average of S1 and S2 U3 would be quantitated using the average of S1 S2 and S3 U4 would be quantitated using the average of S1 S2 S3 and S4 and U5 would be quantitated with the average of S2 S3 S4 and S5 In this example every four calibration replicates roll
302. t Sequence acquisitions do not pause between runs Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 81 3 Method Development Creating an Acquisition Method e Manual Operator has to press Enter to start the run Sequence acquisitions pause for confirmation between runs e External If the data sampling is started from an external trigger select this option The type of trigger is designated when the instrument is configured When you have completed the acquisition parameters click the X box in the upper right corner of the dialog box to exit the dialog Baseline Check When the Baseline Check tab in configuration options for an instrument is enabled the Baseline Check Tab appears in Instrument Setup where you can set the parameters to use when doing a baseline check while acquiring data using this method When a method containing baseline check parameters is used for data acquisition a baseline check occurs when either The Perform Baseline Check check box is checked in the Single Run dialog box or The Run Type of the current Sequence line includes Baseline Check When a baseline check is to occur as part of data acquisition the software first downloads the initial conditions from the method to the instrument These initial conditions are then used to acquire the baseline check data before the normal data acquisition If the baseline check data fails to meet the threshold for any channel then the data acquisition is cancelle
303. t Single Run Acquisition e Calibrate Select this check box if the sample is to be a calibration sample Once this check box is selected the following fields and options are available Calibration level Type the number of the calibration level represented by this calibration standard If this is a single level calibration type 1 Clear all calibration Select this check box if you want to clear all existing calibration factors from your method before running the sample Clear calibration for level Select this check box if you want to clear the existing response factors for this level only before running the sample Print calibration report Select this check box if you want to print a calibration report after running the sample Clear replicates Select this check box if you want to clear all existing replicates from the existing calibration level before running the sample Average replicates Select this check box if you want to average the replicates for this calibration level When you have completed the Single Acquisition Run dialog box click Start to begin the acquisition The current data appears in the chromatogram window as it is acquired and stored to a disk At the end of the run the chromatogram is analyzed according to the method parameters and a report is generated if one is specified If the sample is not analyzed at the end of the acquisition click the Analyze button if you wish to
304. t Trail OF x a a Nl EEE System 6 8 00 10 40 47 AM Pretreatment Setu Function changed from MIX Default Right click the audit trail box to give you access to print functions The Show Detail option gives more detailed information about the currently selected entry ChromQuest User Guide 175 176 3 Method Development Offline Instruments Pretreatment Properties Description ChromQuest User Guide This is used to enter a text description of the pretreatment file The description is saved in the file and can be viewed when opened or used for searching Figure 160 Pretreatment Properties dialog box Description tab Pretreatment Properties Ed Audit Trail Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Offline Instruments Pretreatment Properties Audit Trail This tab is used to turn on the Audit Trail function for the pretreatment file To enable the audit trail function select the Enable audit trail option You are prompted with a warning that if you proceed you cannot disable the audit trail once it is turned on Figure 161 Pretreatment Properties dialog box Audit Trail tab Pretreatment Properties Ed Description Audit Trail M Enable audit trai Prompt for reason at every change C Prompt for reason when saving Pretreatr Cancel Help Prompt for reason at every change This option requires the user to enter a reason for every subsequent change to the P q y q g
305. t by choosing File gt Select Project When you select this command the following screen appears where you can select a project from a list of projects to which you have rights Figure 10 Select Project dialog box Select Project Projects OK Cancel Help dili Click the desired project to highlight it and then click OK The selected project becomes the current project for the instrument ChromQuest User Guide 13 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Features of the Instrument Window The application windows for instruments and offline instruments are very similar with certain aspects that are common to all You can customize the appearance of the application window if you choose adding or removing the Toolbars and Status information However these features are designed to make ChromQuest easier to use and most users prefer to have these turned on Figure 11 Instrument window offline Analysis channel Title bar f SpectraSYSTEM Offline Mjithod new method met Data LabTest2006 dat Project Default U 6000 254nm loj xj Command File Edit View Method Da a Sequence Analysis Control Reports Window Help fe es men H A Ay B t uveooo 254nm Me ee amp SE drae sao xu Menu bar i Time 0 00782446 Minutes Amplitude 0 054 mAU UV6000 254nm 120 LcTest36 Name Retention Time a 2 100 ka 100 2 o N o os 60 2 6
306. t clicking and choosing Print from the shortcut menu To print the current custom report choose Reports gt Print gt Custom Report from the menu bar e Asa part of data acquisition or reprocessing A custom report can be printed at the end of each analysis at the end of a data acquisition run and during or at the end of a sequence Selecting the Print Method Reports option when starting a run sequence acquisition or reprocessing determines whether or not a method custom report is printed No reports are printed unless this option is selected Sequence reports are not printed unless the Print Sequence Reports option is selected e From a sequence run In the Run Type select the Print additional reports check box Use this option to select report templates to print and to specify when you want the report or reports to print Note When opening an instrument online the configured printer is remembered for that instrument regardless of the user When opening an instrument offline the configured printer is remembered for the user of that instrument Figure 242 Sample Run Type s window Sample Run Type s Clear All Calibration Clear Calibration at Level Average Replicates Clear Replicates Begin Loop End Loop Shutdown Print Additional Reports Begin System Suitability System Suitability Standard End System Suitability
307. t least two calibration levels for a linear fit not including zero three levels for a quadratic fit and four levels for a cubic fit Force Zero When this check box is selected the calibration curve is forced through zero Calib Flag When you select Replace WtAverage you can determine how the calibration areas heights for each peak in your method are affected by running a standard they are either replaced or averaged with the current replicate areas in the calibration method If Calib Weight is set to a value other than 100 a weighted average of the areas heights is calculated For details on calibration averaging see Replicates and Averaging Calibrations on page 113 Each time a calibration average is performed the value is saved in the method as Last Area which is subsequently used for calculation of weighted averages Thermo Scientific 3 Method Development Calibration Setup e Calib Weight You can designate a weight for the average of the replicates The weighting factor is applied to replicate injections as shown in the following example Current run value area height 101 Replicate 1 104 Replicate 2 100 Replicate 3 102 Current Last Area Value 102 Using a weighting factor of 60 the new method average is 104 100 102 3 0 6 101 0 4 101 6 Note For Internal Standard calibrations each Replicate represents a ratio of the component area height to internal standard area height
308. t marks on the X Axis Graph X Axis Minor Ticks Select a color for display of minor unit marks on the X Axis Graph X Axis On Off Turns On or Off the X Axis Graph Legend Select a color font or both for display of the graph legend The legend indicates what traces are currently displayed in the window The Legend is turned On or Off from the Axis Setup tab Graph Grid Select a color for display of the grid lines Grid lines are turned On and Off from the Axis Setup tab Data Trace Select a color or line type or both for display of the selected trace Data Annotation Select a color and font for display of the trace Annotations The items to be annotated for a trace are selected in the Annotations tab Data Baseline Select a color or line type or both for display of the baseline Data Baseline Start Tick Select a color or line type or both for display of baseline start ticks Data Baseline Stop Tick Select a color or line type or both for display of baseline stop 26 ChromQuest User Guide ticks Thermo Scientific 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure Item Sub Item Description Data USP Width Select a color or line type or both for display of the USP Width if calculated Data RT Window Select a color or line type or both for display of expected retention time windows for named peaks Data RT Window undet Select a color for display of RT Window for expected peaks that were not detected
309. t that level by leaving the level of interest for that group blank To insert a blank double click the cell and press the DELETE key If you are performing QC checks you should fill out the appropriate columns for your groups See Groups and Group Calibration on page 145 for details on these columns Note As with the Peak table the Group table can be customized to include only those parameter columns that you need for your group calibration To select the group parameters click the upper left corner of the group spreadsheet and select Properties from the drop down list From the dialog box click those parameters you wish to include in the spreadsheet Be sure to save your method To complete the group calibration you must run a calibration standard at each level for which you have entered an amount This can be done manually using stored data files or as a part of a sequence For details on how to calibrate see Calibration Setup on page 111 and Groups and Group Calibration on page 145 ChromQuest User Guide 155 3 Method Development Groups and Group Calibration Group Range Definition 156 ChromQuest User Guide If you want to review or change the chromatogram time ranges currently selected for the group click the Group Def field A dialog box appears with the currently defined ranges for the group You can manually change the ranges if desired Figure 141 Group Range Definition dialog box Group Ran
310. tell you to Select Start of Valley to Valley Click the trace just before the first large peak After you click the instructions tell you to Select End of Valley to Valley Click the trace just after the last peak The Valley to Valley dialog box appears displaying the start and stop points for the event In the Valley to Valley dialog box click Analyze Now to analyze the chromatogram and to add the event to the Integration table Figure 78 Valley to Valley dialog box alley to Yalley x Start Time 5 0 Mimes Add to Table Stop Time fi 0 0 Minutes Cancel fo Help Ix Value Insert into Integration Events table Insert into Manual Integration Fixes table Analyze Now Notice the peaks within the region of the event are now integrated using the valley to valley event and baselines are adjusted accordingly Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Using The Tutorial Files Figure 79 Chromatogram E Channel A 01 x Time 9 99398 Minutes Amplitude 0 254 MAU j __ ChannelA i Multi Calibration Level 3 Area 40 Minutes 5 Click the Integration Events button in the command toolbar Then note the addition of the Valley to Valley event in the table Note If you are performing a multi wavelength analysis there is an integration table for each wavelength in the method For scan data there is an integration table for each discrete wavelength each multi chromatogram
311. the sequence Print sequence reports Select this check box if you want sequence reports to be printed e Begin run By default the run starts immediately If you want to schedule the start of the sequence for a later time or date click the O button to open the Schedule Run dialog box where you can enter or select the time to start the sequence When you have completed your selections in this dialog box click Start to initiate the sequence acquisition You might see the data displayed in real time in the chromatogram windows if the current data is selected for viewing Schedule Run This dialog box appears whenever you start a single run or sequence From here you designate when you want the run to start immediately after a designated amount of time in minutes or at a specific date and time Figure 189 Schedule Run dialog box Schedule Run x C Now Cancel C After fico minutes Help On 7711 2001 7 at 2 31 29 PM 214 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Acquisition Using a Sequence Run Queues ChromQuest uses a sample run queue to keep track of and schedule sequences and single acquisition runs Once a sequence is initiated it is entered into the run queue automatically Viewing the Run Queue Click the View Run Queue button to view the current run queue If a sequence acquisition is in process you see a row in the run queue representing that sequence The qu
312. there is more than one run type designation To view a list of possible Run Types click the blue arrow next to the run type For details on each of these run types see the Sequence section 12 Save the sequence table a Choose File gt Sequence gt Save As from the menu bar The Save Sequence File As dialog box appears Figure 67 Save Sequence File As dialog box Save Sequence File As 2 xi Savein ca Sequence ze EE LabTest seq an multilevel calibration seq File name Tesi Save as type Sequence files seq r Description b Type Test in the File Name box c Click Save Note By default ChromQuest saves sequence files with the seq extension Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 65 2 Tutorial Running a Sequence Running a Sequence 66 ChromQuest User Guide Now that you have created a sequence table you are ready to run a set of samples If you are using an autosampler place sample vials in the tray compartment at the vial locations indicated in the sequence table To start a sequence run Recall the Instrument Wizard by clicking the Instrument Wizard button in the command toolbar In the Instrument Wizard click the Run A Sequence Of Samples button Notice that this button can also be found in the command toolbar The Run Sequence dialog box appears Figure 68 Run Sequence dialog box m Sequence information Start Sequence name D enterprise Projects
313. time window if your peaks tend to drift later in the run Absolute Absolute retention time window sets up a retention time window that is the same for all calibrated peaks You enter a value for the retention time window to be used for the peaks An absolute retention time window does not vary with the retention time of the calibrated peak Click Next to move to the next detected peak Click Back to move to the previous detected peak in the chromatogram To move directly to a specific peak click that peak in the chromatogram The current peak and total peaks in the chromatogram are displayed on the right of the dialog box When you are finished adding peaks to your peak table click Done Each peak you defined becomes a row in your peak table Note that if you already had peaks in your peak table the peaks you just defined are added to those already present To view the peak table click the Peak Group Tables button from the toolbar ChromOQuest User Guide 125 3 Method Development Calibration Setup 126 Define Peaks ChromQuest User Guide With the Define Peaks button you can create a row in the calibration peak table for each detected peak in a selected range You can then edit each peak in the peak table Click the Define Peaks button from the toolbar Or right click and choose Graphical Events Programming gt Define Peaks Enter the peaks for your calibration by clicking the mouse once to the left of the first calibrati
314. tion Clear Calibration at Level Print Calibration Report JAverage Replicates Clear Replicates Begin Loop JEnd Loop Shutdown C Frint Additional Reports OBegin System Suitability _ System Suitability Standard _JEnd System Suitability Begin Summary Begin Calibration _JEnd Calibration Baseline Check Baseline File Runs after the Begin Summary run with Summary Run types are included in the same summary run until another Begin Summary type is encountered in the sequence Once the sequence has been processed you may view the current summary report by choosing Reports gt View gt Sequence Custom Report A box appears where you can select from available custom reports if more than one summary report has been generated Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 261 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports Figure 234 View Sequence Reports dialog box iew Sequence Reports x l Report Template Sequence Summary 1 2 3 4 5 6 C ChromQuest Projects D efault T emplatess Summary brp Select the report you wish to view or print The report then is displayed Figure 235 Sequence Summary Report window E Sequence Summary Report SeqSummary tpl Of x A EEA Tio Page Zomin Zoom Dut Close 600000 400000 200000 0 1 2 3 Peaki Peaz Pea Peak4 4 Channel A Peak1 Peak2 Peak3 Peak4 Data Flerame Sample ID Area Area Area Area muti calibration level 1 dat PNASTOS
315. to be displayed and then press ENTER to accept The selections entered are saved on a per instrument per user basis This allows each user to set his her own peak table parameters for each instrument Set Anchor The blue anchor indicates what column are used to anchor the right left scrolling in your sequence spreadsheet Once this anchor is set columns to the right of the anchor scroll to the right and left Columns to the left of the anchor will not scroll To change the anchor click the name of the column you wish to use as anchor and click Set Anchor The blue anchor moves to the designated anchor column Note When using the anchor it is best to remove all unnecessary columns from the spreadsheet and make the spreadsheet as wide as possible before you set the anchor If you set the anchor to a column that does not currently show on the spreadsheet you will not be able to scroll the spreadsheet Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 135 3 Method Development Calibration Setup Renumbering Peak IDs Peak ID numbers are assigned to calibrated peaks in the order in which they are added If you edited your peak table by adding peaks you might want to renumber the Peak IDs so that the ID numbers are in order by peak retention times To do this right click the peak table and choose Renumber Peak ID s The Peak ID numbers in the peak table are renumbered including Ref and ISTD Peak ID numbers to reflect the changes Note
316. ton to return to the Custom Report editor Viewing Method Custom Reports Another way to view the custom report is by choosing Reports gt View gt Method Custom Report from the menu bar This command is available even when you are not editing the custom report The current method custom report appears in a window for viewing only You cannot edit the report from this window Viewing Sequence Reports Thermo Scientific Once you have processed a sequence that has one or more sequence reports designated you can view the sequence report or reports on your screen by choosing Reports gt View gt Sequence Custom Report A list appears with the sequence reports for the current sequence listed For each sequence report the Report Type is listed along with the sequence rows included in the report and the report template used to produce the report To view a report on screen select it and then click View Figure 241 View Sequence Reports dialog box iew Sequence Reports x Report Type Sequence Records Report Template Sequence Summary 1 2 3 4 5 6 C ChromQuest Projects D efault T emplates S ummary brp ChromQuest User Guide 267 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports 268 Printing Custom Reports You can print custom reports in one of four ways e From within the Custom Report editor To print a report from the Custom Report editor use either the Print button in Print Preview or print the report directly by righ
317. tor 2 Dilutor 3 Action DNanarintiown wu S lt lt lt lt IS IS IS KKK instrument Set Anchor You can customize the sequence spreadsheet to include only the columns you are using Right click the sequence table and choose Properties from the shortcut menu When you select this command a dialog box appears where you can select and deselect the columns to be Figure 180 Sequence Spreadsheet Properties dialog box Properties xi Cancel Help Set Anchor Columns with a check mark are displayed in the spreadsheet The selections are saved on a per user per instrument basis That is each user can set spreadsheet properties for each The blue anchor icon indicates what column is used to anchor the right left scrolling in your sequence spreadsheet Once this anchor is set columns to the right of the anchor scroll to the right and left Columns to the left of the anchor do not scroll To change the anchor click the name of the column you wish to use as anchor and click Set Anchor The blue anchor moves to the designated anchor column Note When using the anchor it is best to remove all unnecessary columns from the spreadsheet and make the spreadsheet as wide as possible before you set the anchor If you set the anchor to a column that does not currently show on the spreadsheet you will not
318. treatment untit E Fie Edit View Method Data Sequence Pretreatment Analysis Control Reports Window Help laj x B S S M suve vvi Ae Blea e E ee e e le TimesNewRoman H A we aa zla a fox z Doug Crews Allan MacDonald Ron Perkins For Help press F1 MIN 4 Sequence Reports ChromQuest User Guide To create a custom report that contains sequence information such as a Sequence Summary report use the Advanced Reports function File gt Advanced Reports gt New The Advanced Reports application enables you to create a Sequence Summary template tpl file that can be used to generate a standard report for any sequence Because the template is not saved as part of a sequence it can be used independently for summarizing data from any sequence For details on how to create a Sequence Summary template refer to the Table Wizard topic in Advanced Reporting on page 275 Thermo Scientific 5 Custom Reports Sequence Reports Viewing a Sequence Report To view or print a complete sequence report you must first process a sequence where one or more of the files in the sequence have Run Types designated as Begin Summary and Summary Run The first run to be included in the summary report is designated as a Begin Summary run and indicates the summary report template to be used for the summary report Figure 233 Sample Run Types dialog box Sample Run Type s Clear All Calibra
319. tting Limits for X Axis and Y Axis ChromQuest User Guide Occasionally you might want to set an absolute range for either the X Axis or Y Axis or both This is done in the Data Graph Properties dialog box Once you have set an absolute range for one or both of these axes the designated chromatograms are always displayed in the chromatogram window using these ranges until you change or reset them Y Axis ranges are set for each chromatogram using the Trace Setup tab To set an absolute voltage range for all chromatograms use the User Defined option for the Scale To field You must then enter a Y Min minimum Y Axis value and Y Max maximum Y Axis value for each chromatogram If you want all chromatograms to be displayed using this same voltage scale enter the same values for all chromatograms Figure 27 Data Graph Properties dialog box Trace Setup tab Trace Setup Axis Setup Appearance EI 4 Normalized eal User Defined gt 3 Trace 2 Data source CurentDa 5 Scale to User Defined 0 H Y min S Y max tC Units vog offset ooo x scale Poo Y offset ooo Y scale pooo Annotations Hide Details Reset Sealing Cancel Apply Help If you want to reset the scaling of all chromatograms to default values click Reset Scaling To set an absolute X Axis range use the Axis Setup tab Here for the chromatograms you can select Autoscale which sets the X Axis
320. tween calibration sets select the Intersperse calibration vials with unknown vials option Reuse calibration vials from first calibration set If you want to run calibration sets sequentially without unknown samples between select the Reuse calibration vials from first calibration set option When you have selected the options on this page click Next to continue Sequence Wizard Reports Use this page to set up summary reports for your sequence Figure 170 Sequence Wizard Reports page Sequence Wizard Reports 188 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard e Summary Use these options to designate summary runs Include unknown runs in summary report If you want your summary report to include unknown runs select this option These runs have their Run Type set for a summary run Include calibration runs in summary report If you want your summary report to include the calibration runs select this box These runs have the Run Type set to be included as a summary run System Suitability Use these options to designate system suitability runs Run calibration as system suitability If you have the system suitability software option and you wish to designate calibration runs as system suitability types select this option This also causes display of system suitability parameters in the sequence spreadsheet I
321. tyle Select the style for your chart from the list of options Font Click this button to change the font for your chart title Initial Cell Enter the cell where the initial data is located the first cell of a series for example In many cases the cell location you want to enter is the cell where the formula for the data series is defined Data Set Select whether the data series extends vertically or horizontally on the spreadsheet Groups Select Single to display one series of data or Multiple to display more than one series of data For example in a sequence summary report where the summary table contains areas from 4 peaks in 5 runs you would choose Single to chart areas from one peak or Multiple to chart areas from all 4 peaks Group Titles Enter a cell reference to be used for titles legends for the charted data series or type in text to be used ChromQuest User Guide 295 5 Custom Reports Advanced Reporting e Display Sample Data Select this check box if you want to view an example of the chart in your advanced report spreadsheet Note This is not the actual data To view the actual data in the chart click Print Preview Cover Cells This button appears at the top of the Advanced Report spreadsheet window It is used to expand or shrink the size of a chart or to create text that spans several cells To use the cover cells button drag your mouse to highlight an area on the spreadsheet where you want the c
322. u have access to additional SEC annotation features Note The Reference Peak window annotation displays the window set in the Peak Table This window is not adjusted for relative retention time Continue to select as many annotations as you wish for this trace When you have finished click OK ChromQuest User Guide 23 1 Basics of Operation Program Architecture and Data Structure You can select or change the annotation for an existing trace by right clicking the chromatogram window and then selecting Annotation The selections you make apply to all traces you open for this channel until you change them and then click OK or Apply If you want to apply the annotation changes to all open channels click Apply To All Annotations are not saved as part of the method and are considered a function of the instrument application If you close a method and reopen it the current settings apply Chromatogram Appearance You can change the appearance of the trace line type color and so on from the Appearance page in the New Trace Properties box lick the Appearance tab to display the options on this page Figure 21 New Trace Properties dialog box Appearance page New Trace Annotation Appearance Scheme X Save As Delete ltem Subitem 1 Current Data Channel Trace k Line Style Size Color Fort Sree al Gr Anale e fer AE Cancel Apply Help Scheme Ifyou have previously saved an appeara
323. uantitated peaks are divided by these factors When you have selected options on this page click Next to continue 182 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard Sequence Wizard Unknowns On this page of the wizard enter information for data storage and sequence runs Figure 163 Sequence Wizard Unknowns page Sequence Wizard Unknowns D enterprise Projects D efault D ata ry e Sample ID Type a sample identification label This can be in numerical or text format or both and will be saved with each data file If you want the system to generate a Sample ID for you automatically click the blue arrow button and select a parameter to be used for the basis of your Sample ID You can select more than one parameter which is added sequentially to the Sample ID Figure 164 Sequence Wizard Unknowns options menu Increment Number For example if you select Line Number and Instrument Name the sample IDs generated are the row number of the sequence followed by the instrument name 3HPLC Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 183 4 Sequence Operations Creating a Sequence Using Sequence Wizard 184 ChromQuest User Guide To use the Increment Number option enter a number to start the increment in angle brackets For example lt 33 gt would start numbering from 33 By default the Increment Number option allows for three digits To reduce o
324. value in the Autosampler Injection Volume box is linked to the configuration of your autosampler c Ensure that the Pretreatment Program File box is empty 7 Click Next to continue to the next page of the Sequence Wizard 62 ChromQuest User Guide Thermo Scientific 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table ChromQuest displays the Sequence Wizard Calibration page The calibration ID and calibration file names are automatically set to the identifications from the Unknowns page Figure 64 Sequence Wizard Calibration page Sequence Wizard Calibration Test lt HHH C ChromQuest Projects D efault D ata Cal_Test lt gt dat zz po l 8 In the Sequence Wizard Calibration page enter information about the calibration standards a In the Number Of Calibration Levels box type 1 Leave the number of Repetitions Per Level at 1 b Select the Clear All Calibration At Start Of Sequence check box ChromQuest clears the area values in the calibration section of the method at the start of the sequence run 9 Click Next to continue to the next page of the Sequence Wizard ChromQuest displays the Sequence Wizard Reports page Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 63 2 Tutorial Creating a Sequence Table Figure 65 Sequence Wizard Reports page Sequence Wizard Reports fe First calibration set only All calibration sets 10 In the Summary area of the Sequence Wiza
325. w 125 127 review calibration temporarily remove calib points 141 using the right mouse button 141 viewing the curves 140 reviewing calibration curves 139 revoking electronic signatures 91 right mouse clicks 16 rolling average calibration 118 run queue adding to 215 run sequence 201 212 S sample queues 215 sampling frequency 81 sampling rate 107 save method as 100 saving a default method 171 saving data file 11 saving files 11 selecting a new project 13 ChromQuest User Guide 303 Index T sequence insert new sequence 201 overview 180 process sequence 199 resizing sequence spreadsheet columns 201 right mouse click 195 run queues 215 sequence run 201 spreadsheet basics 194 spreadsheet properties 198 sequence calibration report 263 sequence check standard report 273 sequence custom reports 229 260 sequence duplicate report 272 sequence file saving 223 sequence list 263 sequence operations 179 sequence properties 209 sequence reports automatically printing 263 sequence reprocessing 219 sequence run 212 sequence spike report 269 sequence spreadsheet 202 sequence summary reports 220 sequence system suitability report 275 Sequence Wizard calibration 186 for acquisition 181 from existing data files 191 191 method 181 open data fies for reprocessing 193 reprocessing 191 select files for reprocessing 192 summary reports 188 unknowns 183 server data file storage 5 single run acquisition 101 smoothing 40
326. wavelength and the spectrum max plot Figure 80 Integration Events window E Integration Events Detector 1 oy xi 0 2 50 0 6 Remove the Valley to Valley event from the Integration Events table by clicking its number with the mouse and then choose Edit gt Delete from the menu bar You can also test integration without the event yet leave it in the timed event table by clearing the check box next to the Valley to Valley event and then reintegrating the chromatogram 7 Close the Integration Events Table Practice adding and deleting integration timed events using the multi calibration level 3 dat data file until you feel comfortable with adding and deleting integration events You have completed the ChromQuest Tutorial Detailed explanations on how to create multi level calibrations create custom reports and create and use sample sequences are given in later sections In addition do not forget to use the extensive Help system as you work with the software Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 75 Method Development Thermo Scientific A ChromQuest method contains complete information for acquisition integration and calibration of a chromatography run A method has four main sections as follows e Instrument Setup e Integration Timed Events e Calibration e Custom reports The method can also contain general data processing information such as data export options valve programs and us
327. windows if a relative retention time window is used Use a relative retention time window if your peaks tend to drift later in the run The absolute retention time window sets up a retention time window that is the same for all calibrated peaks You enter a value for the retention time window to be used for the peaks An absolute retention time window does not vary with the retention time of the calibrated peak e Units Enter the units to be used for labeling the concentration results using the calibrated peaks e Quantitate peaks on Select Area or Height for the basis of calculation of response factors Note If you are doing both Peak and Group quantitation using internal standards both Peaks and Groups must use the same quantitation measurement type area or height e Minimum peak area If you enter a minimum peak area any peaks found within the defined peak range whose areas fall below this limit are not considered calibration peaks and are not entered in the calibration peak table e Add all peaks to table Select this button to add the peaks in the current defined peak range to existing peaks in your calibration table e Replace existing peaks in table Select this button if you want to replace all existing peaks in the current calibration peak table with the peaks from the defined peak range Click OK to accept your selections Thermo Scientific ChromQuest User Guide 127 3 Method Development Calibration Setup

ChromQuest 5.0 Chromatography Data System User Guide Version A

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents